LG 19LU5000 - Television

19LU5000 - Television LG - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free 19LU5000 LG in PDF.

📄 176 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice LG 19LU5000 - page 6
View the manual : Français FR English EN
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about 19LU5000 LG

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Television in PDF format for free! Find your manual 19LU5000 - LG and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. 19LU5000 by LG.

USER MANUAL 19LU5000 LG

Digital Video Broadcasting

Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video

Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)

LCD TV | PLASMA TV OWNER'S MANUAL

LCD TV MODELS

Please read this manual carefully before operating your TV.

Retain it for future reference.

Record the model number and serial number of the TV.

Refer to the label on the back cover and quote this information.

To your dealer when requiring any service.

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV | PLASMA TV OWNER'S MANUAL - 1
ENERGY STAR

This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR in the “factory default (Home Use mode)” setting and this is the setting in which power savings will be achieved.

Changing the factory default picture setting or enabling other features will increase power consumption that could exceed the limits necessary to qualify for Energy Star rating.

Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase)

RW120
LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 1

(19/22LU50**

/19/22LU40**

/19/22LH20**)

RW230
LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 2

(26LU50**/32LF25**

/26/32LH20**/32LH30**

/32LH40**/32LH49**

/32LH50**/32LH70**)

AW-47LG30M
LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 3

(32/37/42LF25**

32/37/42LH20**

/32/37/42/47LH30**

/32/37/42/47LH40**

/32/37/42/47LH49**

/32/37/42/47LH50**

/32/37/42/47LH70**)

AW-50PG60MS
LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 4

(50PS70**/50PS80**)

AW-60PG60MS
LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 5

(60PS70**/60PS80**)

Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 6

text_image Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual

LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 7
Batteries

LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 8

text_image V. or This it

Remote Control

LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 9

Ferrite Core (This item is not included for all models.)
LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 10
Power Cord

This item is not included for all models.
LG 19LU5000 - Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) - 11
* Lightly wipe any stains or fingerprints on the surface of the TV with the polishing cloth.
Polishing Cloth Polishing cloth for use on the screen.
Do not use excessive force. This may cause scratching or discolouration.

PLASMA TV models

LG 19LU5000 - PLASMA TV models - 1

Cable Holder
(Refer to p.23)
LG 19LU5000 - PLASMA TV models - 2
Protection cover

(Refer to p.24)
LG 19LU5000 - PLASMA TV models - 3

LG 19LU5000 - PLASMA TV models - 4
Bolts for stand assembly
(Only 50PS70**, 50PS80**,)
(Refer to p.18)

LG 19LU5000 - PLASMA TV models - 5
Cable management clip
(Refer to p.23)

LG 19LU5000 - PLASMA TV models - 6
x 4
Transparent rubber stand (If the transparent rubber stand on the bottom of the stand is lost, attach the spare rubber stand.)

LCD TV models

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 1
Cable management dip
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
(Refer to p.23)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 2
Stand rear cover
(Only 37/42/47LH70**)
(Refer to p.21)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 3
Cable Holder
(Only 19/22LU40**,
19/22/26LU50**)
(Refer to p.22)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 4
Cable management clip
(Only 19/22LH20**)
(Refer to p.22)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 5
1-screw for stand fixing
(Only 26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**,
26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LH30**,
32/37/42LH40**, 32/37/42LH49**
32/37/42LH50**, 32/37LH70**)
(Refer to p.20)

Bolts for stand assembly
(Refer to p. 17\~19)
LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 6
(Only 32/37/42LF25**,
26/32/37/42LH20**
32/37/42/47LH30***,
32/37/42/47LH40***
32/37/42/47LH49**.
32/37/42/47LH50**)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 7
(Only
32/37/42
LF25**)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 8
(Only
19/22LU40**.
19/22LU50**)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 9
(Only
26LU50**)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 10

(Only 32LH70**)
LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 11
M4x20

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 12
M4x16

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 13
M4x20

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 14
M4x16
(Only 42LH70**)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 15

natural_image Illustration of various mechanical parts including a bracket, flat plate, and angled cutout (no text or symbols)

Protection Cover
(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**)
(Refer to p.24)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 16
Protective Bracket
and Bolt for Power Cord
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
(Refer to p.23)

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV models - 17
USB extension cable
(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)
Make sure to use the provided
USB extension cable, Which is
specially designed for a slim fit.

ACCESSORIES 1

PREPARATION

Front Panel Controls.... 4

Back Panel Information.... 11

Stand Installation.... 17

Detaching stand....19

Attaching the TV to a desk....20

Desktop Pedestal Installation.... 20

Positioning your display 20

Kensington Security System ......20

Careful installation advice 21

Swivel Stand 21

To use the stand rear cover ....21

Back Cover for Wire Arrangement.... 22

Not Using the desk-type stand 24

Wall Mount: Horizontal Installation.... 25

Antenna Connection 26

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

HD Receiver Setup.... 27

DVD Setup 29

VCR Setup.... 32

Insertion of CI Module 34

Digital Audio Out Setup 35

Headphone Setup 35

Other A/V Source Setup 36

Usb Setup.... 37

PC Setup.... 38

- Screen Setup for PC Mode......42

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

Remote Control Key Functions 46

Turning on the TV.... 50

Programme Selection 50

Volume Adjustment 50

Quick Menu 51

On-Screen Menus Selection and Adjustment..... 52

Auto Programme Tuning.... 53

Manual Programme Tuning (In Digital Mode) ..... 55

Manual Programme Tuning (In Analogue Mode) ... 56

Programme Edit 58

Booster(In Digital Mode)......60

Software Update.... 61

Diagnostics 62

CI Information.... 63

Selecting the Programme List.... 64

Favourite Programme Setup.... 65

Input List.... 66

Input Label 67

Simple manual 68

SIMPLINK 69

AV Mode....72

Initializing (Reset to original factory settings) .....73

TO USE A BLUETOOTH

Precautions when using the Bluetooth .... 74

Setting the Bluetooth.... 75

Set TV PIN....76

Bluetooth headset

- Connecting a new Bluetooth headset ......77

- Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered 77

- Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use.....78

- When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset....78

Managing Registered Bluetooth device 79

My Bluetooth Information....80

Receiving Photos from external Bluetooth device .....81

Listening to the Musics from external Bluetooth device.....81

TO USE A USB DEVICE

When connecting the a USB device 82

Photo List 83

Music List....87

Movie List....90

DivX Registration Code....94

Deactivation....95

EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE) (IN DIGITAL MODE)

Switch on/off EPG 96

Select a Programme.... 96

Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode...... 96

Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode....97

Button Function in Date Change Mode...... 97

Button Function in Extended Description Box...... 98

Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode...... 98

Button Function in Schedule List Mode 98

PICTURE CONTROL

Picture Size (Aspect Ratio) Control 99

Picture Wizard....101

Energy Saving....102

Preset Picture Settings

- Picture Mode-Preset.... 103

Manual Picture Adjustment

- Picture Mode-User option 104

Picture Improvement Technology...... 105

Expert Picture Control.... 106

Picture Reset 109

Power Indicator 110

Image Sticking Minimization (ISM) Method...... 111

Demo Mode.... 112

Mode Setting....113

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

Auto Volume Leveler.... 114

Clear Voice II....115

Preset Sound Settings - Sound Mode...... 116

Sound Setting Adjustment -User Mode ......117

SRS TruSurround XT 117

Balance.... 118

TV Speakers On/ Off Setup....119

Selecting Digital Audio Out 120

Audio Reset 121

Audio Description (In Digital Mode only)......122 I/II

- Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only).... 123

- NICAM Reception (In Analogue Mode Only).... 124

- Speaker Sound Output Selection.... 124

On-Screen Menu Language/Country Selection.... 125

Language Selection (In Digital Mode only)...... 126

TIME SETTING

Clock Setup 127

Auto On/ Off Time Setting 128

Sleep Timer Setting 129

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS

Set Password & Lock System.... 130

Block Programme.... 131

Parental Control (In Digital Mode only)...... 132

External Input Blocking....133

Key Lock.... 134

TELETEXT

Switch on/off.... 135

SIMPLE Text 135

TOP Text.... 135

FASTEXT 136

Special Teletext Functions 136

DIGITAL TELETEXT

Teletext within Digital Service.... 137

Teletext in Digital Service.... 137

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting.... 138

Maintenance 140

Product Specifications 141

IR Codes 150

External Control Device Setup 152

FRONT PANEL CONTROLS

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

Plasma TV Models

CAUTION

When the TV cannot be turned on with the remote control, press the main power button on the TV. (When the power is turned off with the main power button on the TV, it will not be turned on with the remote control).
▶ Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from fragments of glass, or the TV may fall.
▶ Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.

50/60PS70**
LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 1

text_image 30/601 370** PROGRAMME P ▲ P ▼ VOLUME △+ △- OK OK◎ MENU MENU INPUT INPUT POWER ○/1 Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • The LED is off while the TV remains on. Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the sur- rounding conditions. Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator

50/60PS80**

LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 2

text_image PROGRAMME VOLUME OK MENU INPUT POWER Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • The LED is off while the TV remains on. Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the sur- rounding conditions. Remote Control Sensor

LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70**

LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 3

text_image Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions Remote Control Sensor Moving LED POWER(Touch Sensor) Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • Illuminates whitish when the TV is switched on. Note: You can adjust Power Indicator in the OPTION menu. PROGRAMME VOLUME OK OK MENU INPUT ON OFF Main Power Switch

LCD TV Models : 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**
LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 4

text_image (Only 19/22/26LH20*) POWER INPUT MENU OK VOLUME PROGRAMME ○/I INPUT MENU OK - | + - ▲ + - ▲ P ▲ Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator Illuminates red in standby mode. Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on. (Only 32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30*) PROGRAMME VOLUME OK MENU INPUT POWER ON OFF Main Power Switch

LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**

LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 5

text_image PROGRAMME VOLUME OK OK MENU MENU INPUT INPUT POWER /1 Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on. Main Power Switch

LCD TV Models : 19/22LU40**
LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 6

text_image POWER | INPUT | MENU | OK | VOLUME | PROGRAMME #/I INPUT MENU OK - △ + √ P ^ Main Power Switch Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator • illuminates red in standby mode. • illuminates white when the TV is switched on.

LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25**
LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 7

text_image CD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25** PROGRAMME VOLUME OK OK MENU MENU INPUT INPUT POWER Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator

Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator

- illuminates red in standby mode.

- illuminates blue when the TV is switched on.

LCD TV Models : 19/22/26LU50**
LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 8

text_image (Only 19/22LU50*) POWER INPUT MENU OK VOLUME PROGRAMME ○/I INPUT MENU OK - △ + √ P ^ (Only 26LU50*) PROGRAMME P VOLUME OK OK MENU INPUT POWER ○/I Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator Illuminates red in standby mode. Illuminates white when the TV is switched on. ON OFF Main Power Switch

BACK PANEL INFORMATION

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

Plasma TV Models
LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 1

text_image V Models 1 2 3 4 5 HDMI IN AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT RGB IN (PC) RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) 6 7 8 9 AV1 AV2 VIDEO PH L ANTENNA IN COMPONENT IN VIDEO S-VIDEO AUDIO-R VIDEO AV IN3 PCMCIA CARD SLOT USB IN HDMI IN 4 10 11 2 12

① Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page. Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.

② HDMI/DVI IN Input

Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI(VIDEO)signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable.

3 RGB/DVI Audio Input

Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.

4 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable.

5 Component Input

Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks.

6 RGB IN Input

Connect the output from a PC.

7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.

⑧ Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)

Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks.

9 Antenna Input

Connect antenna or cable to this jack.

10 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot

Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT. (This feature is not available in all countries.)

11 USB Input

Connect USB storage device to this jack.

12 S-Video Input

Connect S-Video out from an S-VIDEO device. Audio/Video Input

Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks.

LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70**

LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 2

text_image USB IN HDMI/DVI IN 4 3 2 1(DVI) PCMCIA CARD SLOT AV IN3 RGB (PC) AUDIO (RGB/DVI) RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) AV1 (RGB) AV2 S+VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L(MONO) R COMPONENT IN Y Pe Pr L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT ANTENNA IN H/PΩ

① Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page. Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
2 USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack.
③ HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI(VIDEO)signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable.
4 S-Video Input Connect S-Video out from an S-VIDEO device. Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks.
5 RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
6 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.

⑦ Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack.

⑧ Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. ⑨ OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable.

10 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks.

11 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.

12 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT. (This feature is not available in all countries.)

LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**
(Only 32/37/42/47LH50**/ 32/37/42/47LH49**)
(Only 32/37/42/47LH50**/
32/37/42/47LH49**)
LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 3

text_image HDMI / DVI IN 3 2 1(DVI)

LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 4

text_image Diagram of a computer monitor with labeled parts, showing front, rear, and side views with numbered annotations.

LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 5

text_image HDMI / DVI IN 2 1(DVI) AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT RGB IN (PC) RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) COMPONENT IN Y VIDEO P0 P0 L R AUDIO AV1 (RGB) AV2 ANTENNA IN

LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 6

text_image USB IN PCMCIA CARD SLOT HDMI IN 3 VIDEO [MONO AUDIO-R] AV IN 3 H/P Q 10 11 5 12 13 USB IN PCMCIA CARD SLOT HDMI IN 4 10 11 5 12 13 H/P Q 13

① Power Cord Socket
This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page. Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
2 RGB/DVI Audio Input
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.
Use an Optical audio cable.
4 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)
Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks.
5 HDMI/DVI IN Input
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable.
6 RGB IN Input
Connect the output from a PC.

⑦ RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.

8 Component Input

Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks.

9 Antenna Input

Connect antenna or cable to this jack.

10 USB Input

Connect USB storage device to this jack.

11 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT. (This feature is not available in all countries.)

12 Audio/Video Input

Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks.

13 Headphone Socket

Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.

LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30** (Only 32/37/42

LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 7

text_image 32/37/42/4/LH30** (Only 32/37/42/47LH30*) USB IN SERVICE ONLY HDMI 2 HDMI /DVI IN 1 13 AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT IN AV1 (RGB) AV2 R PA PRL AVIO ANTENNA IN HDMI IN 3 PCMCIA CARD SLOT HDMI IN 2 VIDEO LMONO AUDIO R AV IN 3 H/PΩ PCMCIA CARD SLOT HDMI IN 2 VIDEO LMONO AUDIO R AV IN 3 H/PΩ PCMCIA CARD SLOT (Only 32/37/42/LF25**)

① Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page. Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.

2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.

3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable.

4 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks.

5 HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable.

6 RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC.

⑦ RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.

8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks.

9 Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack.

10 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT. (This feature is not available in all countries.)

11 Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks.

12 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.

13 SERVICE ONLY PORT

LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20**
LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 8

text_image V Models : 19/22LH20** PCMCIA CARD SLOT H/P ANTENNA IN COMPONENT IN AV1 (RGB) AV2 AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT RGB IN (PC) RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) USB IN SERVICE ONLY HDMI / DVI IN 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4

1 Power Cord Socket

This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page. Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.

② RGB/DVI Audio Input

Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.

3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

Connect digital audio to various types of equipment.

Connect to a Digital Audio Component.

Use an Optical audio cable.

4 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2)

Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks.

⑤ HDMI/DVI IN Input

Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable.

6 RGB IN Input

Connect the output from a PC.

7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT

Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.

This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.

⑧ Component Input

Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks.

9 Antenna Input

Connect antenna or cable to this jack.

10 Headphone Socket

Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.

11 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot

Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT.

(This feature is not available in all countries.)

12 SERVICE ONLY PORT

LG 19LU5000 - BACK PANEL INFORMATION - 9

text_image LCD TV Models : 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50** (Only 26LU50**) USB IN SERVICE ONLY AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT RGB (PC) AV1 (RGB) AV2 PCMCIA CARD SLOT HDMI / DVI IN RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) AV1 (RGB) AV2 VIDEO Pb L AUDIO COMPONENT IN ANTENNA IN HDMI IN 3 VIDEO L/MOIO AUDIO R AV IN 3 H/PΩ

① Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page. Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power.
2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.
3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable.
4 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks.
5 HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable.
6 RGB Input Connect the output from a PC.
7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.

8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks.
⑨ Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack.
10 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
11 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT. (This feature is not available in all countries.)
12 SERVICE ONLY PORT
13 Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks.

STAND INSTALLATION

■ Image shown may differ from your TV

When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully, the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force, the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.

Only 32/37/42/47LH70**

1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.

LG 19LU5000 - STAND INSTALLATION - 1

natural_image Isometric line drawing of a device with internal components (no text or symbols)

2 Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the Stand Base of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - STAND INSTALLATION - 2

text_image 32LH70** M4x20 Stand Body Stand Base 47LH70** M4x16 M4x20 37LH70**

LG 19LU5000 - STAND INSTALLATION - 3

text_image 42LH70** M4x20 Stand Body Stand Base

3 Assemble the TV as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - STAND INSTALLATION - 4

natural_image Diagram showing two views of a device with rotating wheels and a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

4 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - STAND INSTALLATION - 5

text_image 32/37LH70** M4x20 42/47LH70** M4x16

Only 26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**

1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.

LG 19LU5000 - STAND INSTALLATION - 6

② Assemble the TV as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - STAND INSTALLATION - 7

natural_image Diagram showing a device's internal components and assembly, including a close-up view of the interior (no text or symbols present)

3 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - STAND INSTALLATION - 8

natural_image Technical illustration of a mechanical component with a close-up inset showing a bolt and pin (no text or symbols)

Only 19/22LH20\*\*

1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 1

natural_image Isometric line drawing of a device casing with internal components and a textured base (no text or symbols)

2 Assemble the TV as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 2

text_image Cover Base

Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**

1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 3

natural_image Illustration of a laptop with a screen, placed on a cushioned surface (no text or symbols)

2 Fix the 2 or 3 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 4

text_image (Only 26LU50**)

Only 50PS70\*\*/50PS80\*\*

1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 50PS70\*\*/50PS80\*\* - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with internal channels and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

② Assemble the TV as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 50PS70\*\*/50PS80\*\* - 2

natural_image Technical illustration of a device's internal structure with an inset magnified view showing a component being inserted (no text or symbols present)

3 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 50PS70\*\*/50PS80\*\* - 3

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with cross-sectional view (no text or symbols)

LG 19LU5000 - Only 50PS70\*\*/50PS80\*\* - 4

natural_image Simple line drawing of a mechanical component with a labeled 'Front' point (no other text or symbols)

When assembling the stand, make sure to distinguish and assemble the front and rear side of the stand correctly.

Only 32/37/42LF25\*\*

1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 32/37/42LF25\*\* - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a rectangular electronic component with a central slot, placed on a textured surface (no text or symbols)

2 Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the Cover Base of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 32/37/42LF25\*\* - 2

text_image Stand Body Cover Base

3 Assemble the TV as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 32/37/42LF25\*\* - 3

natural_image Technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

4 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 32/37/42LF25\*\* - 4

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bolt inserted into a housing with a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

DETACHING STAND

Only 19/22LU40\*\*, 19/22/26LU50\*\*

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LU40\*\*, 19/22/26LU50\*\* - 1

natural_image Illustration of a mechanical device with a rotating wheel and rectangular components on a sheet (no text or symbols)

2 Loose the bolts and then detach the stand from TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LU40\*\*, 19/22/26LU50\*\* - 2

text_image (Only 26LU50**)

3 Loose the bolts from TV. Detach the Cover Base from TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LU40\*\*, 19/22/26LU50\*\* - 3

text_image Cover Base (Only 26LU50**)

4 Detach the Stand Body from TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LU40\*\*, 19/22/26LU50\*\* - 4

text_image Stand Body

ATTACHING THE TV TO A DESK

(Only 26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LH30**, 32/37/42LH40**, 32/37/42LH49**, 32/37/42LH50**, 32/37LH70**)

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially causing injury or damaging the product. Use only an attached screw.

LG 19LU5000 - ATTACHING THE TV TO A DESK - 1

natural_image Pure technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with no visible text, numbers, or symbols

1 - Screw

(provided as parts of the product)
LG 19LU5000 - ATTACHING THE TV TO A DESK - 2

text_image Stand Desk

LG 19LU5000 - ATTACHING THE TV TO A DESK - 3

WARNING

▶ To prevent TV from falling over, the TV should be securely attached to the floor/wall per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking, or rocking the machine may cause injury.

DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION

For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 4" (10cm) all around the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - DESKTOP PEDESTAL INSTALLATION - 1

text_image 4 inches 4 inches 4 inches 4 inches

POSITIONING YOUR DISPLAY

(Only 19/22LH20**)

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
■ Adjust the position of the panel in various ways for maximum comfort.

- Tilt range

LG 19LU5000 - POSITIONING YOUR DISPLAY - 1

text_image 12° 0° 0° 3°

LG 19LU5000 - POSITIONING YOUR DISPLAY - 2

NOTE

The following model is a fixed stand type model without the Tilt and Swivel features so excessive pressure may damage the set.

-19/22/26LU50**, 19/22LU40**

KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM

■ This feature is not available for all models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel. Connect the Kensington Security System cable as shown below. For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security System, refer to the user's guide provided with the Kensington Security System.

For further information, contact http://www.kensington.com, the internet homepage of the Kensington company. Kensington sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such as notebook PCs and LCD projectors.

NOTE

- The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory.

NOTES

a. If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a small “flicker” when it is turned on.
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.
b. Some minute dot defects may be visible on the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue spots. However, they have no adverse effect on the monitor's performance.
c. Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your finger(s) against it for long periods of time.
Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTES - 1

natural_image Illustration of a computer monitor with cable and a small sphere attached to its side, placed on a desk (no text or symbols visible)

CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE

  • You should purchase necessary components to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on the market.
    ■ Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the possibility of it falling when pushed.
    The instructions shown below are a safer way to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoiding the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled. This will prevent the TV from falling forward and causing injury. This will also prevent the TV from damage. Ensure that children do not climb or hang from the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE - 1

text_image 1 2

LG 19LU5000 - CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Component 1"] --> B["Arrow 1"]
    A --> C["Arrow 2"]
    D["Component 2"] --> E["Arrow 2"]
    D --> F["Arrow 3"]

1 Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the product to the wall as shown in the picture.

(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then bolts.)

* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes.

2 Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the wall. Match the height of the bracket that is mounted on the wall.

LG 19LU5000 - CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE - 3

natural_image Simple line drawing of a computer monitor with a stand and label '3' (no text or symbols on the device itself)

3 Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for alignment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product.

NOTE

▶ When moving the TV undo the cords first.
▶ Use a platform or cabinet strong and large enough to support the size and weight of the TV.
▶ To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the same.

SWIVEL STAND

(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**)

■ Image shown may differ from your TV. After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set manually to the left or right direction by 20 degrees to suit your viewing position.

LG 19LU5000 - SWIVEL STAND - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with angular motion arrows, no text or symbols present

TO USE THE STAND REAR COVER (Only 37/42/47LH70\*\*)

■ Image shown may differ from your TV. Install the STAND REAR COVER as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - TO USE THE STAND REAR COVER (Only 37/42/47LH70\*\*) - 1

text_image STAND REAR COVER

Grip the knob in your fingers and pull it.

LG 19LU5000 - TO USE THE STAND REAR COVER (Only 37/42/47LH70\*\*) - 2

natural_image Illustration of a computer monitor with a close-up view showing hands operating the screen (no text or symbols present)

BACK COVER FOR WIRE ARRANGEMENT

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20\*\*

1 Connect the cables as necessary.

To connect additional equipment, see the EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP section.

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20\*\* - 1

2 Install the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20\*\* - 2

text_image CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP

3 Fit the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20\*\* - 3

natural_image Illustration of a computer monitor with an inset close-up showing internal cable routing (no text or symbols)

How to remove the cable management clip (LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20\*\*)

Hold the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP with both hands and pull it backward.

LG 19LU5000 - How to remove the cable management clip (LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20\*\*) - 1

NOTE

▶ Do not use the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP to lift the TV.
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the TV may be damaged.

LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**

1 Connect the cables as necessary.

To connect additional equipment, see the EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP section.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 1

2 Open the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 2

text_image CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP

3 Fit the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 3

natural_image Illustration of a computer monitor with an inset close-up showing internal components (no text or symbols)

LCD TV Models : 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**

After Connecting the cables as necessary, install CABLE HOLDER as shown and bundle the cables.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 4

natural_image Diagram showing a computer monitor with two spherical objects and a magnified inset of a small object (no text or symbols present)

LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70\*\*

1 Align the hole with the tab on the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP. Turn the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP as shown. Note : that excessive force might cause damage to the product when using Cable Management clip.

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70\*\* - 1

text_image CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP

2 Connect the cables as necessary. To connect additional equipment, see the External equipment Setup section.

LG 19LU5000 - LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70\*\* - 2

natural_image Diagram showing a computer monitor with cable routing and an inset close-up of cables (no text or symbols)

How to secure the power cable

(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)

1 Secure the power cable with the PROTECTIVE BRACKET and the bolt as shown. It will help prevent the power cable from being removed by accident.

LG 19LU5000 - How to secure the power cable - 1

text_image Bolt PROTECTIVE BRACKET

Plasma TV Models

1 After Connecting the cables as necessary, install CABLE HOLDER as shown and bundle the cables. To connect additional equipment, see the External equipment Setup section.

LG 19LU5000 - Plasma TV Models - 1

text_image CABLE HOLDER

2 Install the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP as shown.

LG 19LU5000 - Plasma TV Models - 2

text_image CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP

How to remove the cable man- agement clip

Hold the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP with both hands and pull it upward.

LG 19LU5000 - How to remove the cable man- agement clip - 1

natural_image Illustration of a monitor setup with an inset showing a mechanical device mounted on a stand (no text or symbols visible)

NOTE

▶ Do not use the CABLE MANAGEMENT CLIP to lift the TV. - If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the TV may be damaged.

NOT USING THE DESK-TYPE STAND

(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**)

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the protection cover.

Plasma TV models
LG 19LU5000 - NOT USING THE DESK-TYPE STAND - 1

text_image Plasma TV Models PROTECTION COVER

Insert the PROTECTION COVER into the TV until clicking sound.

LCD TV models

Only 32/37/42/47LH70**

LG 19LU5000 - NOT USING THE DESK-TYPE STAND - 2

text_image PROTECTION COVER

After removing the protection paper from the protection cover, adhere it to the TV as shown.

Only 26/32/37/42LH20**,

32/37/42/47LH30**, 32/37/42/47LH40**,

32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**

LG 19LU5000 - NOT USING THE DESK-TYPE STAND - 3

text_image sert the PROTECTION OVER into the TV until

PROTECTION COVER

Insert the PROTECTION

COVER into the TV until clicking sound.

Only 32/37/42LF25**

LG 19LU5000 - NOT USING THE DESK-TYPE STAND - 4

text_image Insert the PROTECTION

Insert the PROTECTION

COVER into the TV until clicking sound.

PROTECTION COVER

Only 19/22LH20\*\*

1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a box containing a stack of documents or files, with no visible text or symbols.

2 Loose the bolts from TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of a computer monitor rear panel with mounting holes and ventilation slots (no text or symbols)

3 Detach the stand from TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 3

natural_image Diagram showing internal components of a device with a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

4 Insert the Protection Cover into the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 4

text_image PROTECTION COVER

5 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - Only 19/22LH20\*\* - 5

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with mounting holes and internal structure (no text or symbols)

■ The TV can be installed in various ways such as on a wall, or on a desktop etc.
■ The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.

EARTHING

Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent possible electric shock. If grounding methods are not possible, have a qualified electrician install a separate circuit breaker.

Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to telephone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.

LG 19LU5000 - EARTHING - 1

text_image Power Supply Circuit breaker

WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION

We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.
We recommend that you purchase a wall mounting bracket which supports VESA standard.
■ LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer.

LG 19LU5000 - WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION - 1

NOTE

▶ Should Install wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor.
▶ Should use a special wall mount, if you want to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.
The surface that wall mount is to be mounted on should be of sufficient strength to support the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, natural rock, brick and hollow block.
Installing screw type and length depends on the wall mount used. Further information, refer to the instructions included with the mount.
▶ LG is not liable for any accidents or damage to property or TV due to incorrect installation:
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount is used.
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface which may cause TV to fall and cause personal injury.
- Not following the recommended Installation method.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 1

text_image 4 inches 4 inches 4 inches 4 inches 4 inches

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 2

text_image A B
ModelVESA (A * B)Standard ScrewQuantity
19/22LU40**100 * 100M44
19/22LU50**100 * 100M44
26LU50**200 * 100M44
32LF25**200 * 100M44
37/42LF25**200 * 200M64
19/22LH20**100 * 100M44
26/32LH20**200 * 100M44
37/42LH20**200 * 200M64
32LH30**200 * 100M44
37/42LH30**200 * 200M64
47LH30**200 * 200M64
32LH40**200 * 100M44
37/42/47LH40**200 * 200M64
32LH49**200 * 100M44
37/42/47LH49**200 * 200M64
32LH50**200 * 100M44
37/42/47LH50**200 * 200M64
32LH70**200 * 100M44
37/42/47LH70**200 * 200M64
50PS70**400 * 400M64
60PS70**600 * 400M84
50PS80**400 * 400M64
60PS80**600 * 400M84

■ To prevent damage do not connect to the mains outlet until all connections are made between the devices.

ANTENNA CONNECTION

■ For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction.
■ An antenna cable and converter are not supplied.

LG 19LU5000 - ANTENNA CONNECTION - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Wall Antenna Socket"] --> B["Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments (Connect to wall antenna socket)"]
    C["Outdoor Antenna (VHF, UHF)"] --> D["Single-family Dwellings/Houses (Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)"]
    B --> E["RF Coaxial Wire (75 ohm)"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["Antenna IN"]

LG 19LU5000 - ANTENNA CONNECTION - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Antenna"] --> B["UHF"]
    A --> C["VHF"]
    B --> D["Signal Amplifier"]
    C --> D
    D --> E["Antenna IN"]

In poor signal areas, to achieve better picture quality it may be necessary to install a signal amplifier to the antenna as shown above.
■ If signal needs to be split for two TVs, use an antenna signal splitter for connection.

Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)

Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic wave when connecting the power cord.

The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power plug, the better it is.

LG 19LU5000 - Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.) - 1

text_image Install the power plug closely.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

■ To avoid damaging any equipment, never plug in any power cord until you have finished connecting all equipment.
This section on EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly uses diagrams for the Plasma TV models.
■ Image shown may differ from your TV.

HD RECEIVER SETUP

This TV can receive Digital RF/Cable signals without an external digital set-top box. However, if you do receive Digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device, refer to the diagram as shown below.

Connecting with a Component cable

1 Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the digital set top box to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO jacks on the TV.
2 Connect the audio output of the digital set-top box to the COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on the TV.
3 Turn on the digital set-top box. (Refer to the owner's manual for the digital set-top box.)
4 Select Component input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with a Component cable - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Component IN"] -->|Y| B["AV2"]
    A -->|P8| C["VIDEO"]
    A -->|P8| D["AUDIO"]
    A -->|R| E["Antenna"]
    F["Component In"] -->|Y| G["P8"]
    F -->|P8| H["P8"]
    F -->|L| I["L"]
    F -->|R| J["R"]
    K["Component In"] -->|Y| L["AV2"]
    K -->|P8| M["VIDEO"]
    K -->|P8| N["AUDIO"]
    K -->|R| O["Antenna"]
SignalComponentHDMI
480i/576iOX
480p/576pOO
720p/1080iOO
1080pO(50/60Hz only)O(24Hz/30Hz/50Hz/60Hz)

Connecting a set-top box with an HDMI cable

1 Connect the digital set-top box to HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 (Except for 19/22LH20**), HDMI IN 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**) or HDMI IN 4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) jack on the TV.
2 Turn on the digital set-top box. (Refer to the owner's manual for the digital set-top box.)
3 Select HDMI1, HDMI2(Except for 19/22LH20**), HDMI3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**) or HDMI4(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.

NOTE

▶ Check that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher. If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display can result. Please use the latest cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3.

Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable

1 Connect the digital set-top box to HDMI/DVI IN 1 jack on the TV.
2 Connect the audio output of the digital set-top box to the AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
3 Turn on the digital set-top box. (Refer to the owner's manual for the digital set-top box.)
4 Select HDMI1 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["3 HDMI IN"] --> B["1"]
    B --> C["1"]
    D["AV1"] --> E["RGB IN (PC)"]
    E --> F["RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE)"]
    G["HDMI-DTV OUTPUT"] --> H["1"]
    I["AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI)"] --> J["OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT"]

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable - 2

text_image HDMI IN 3 2 1 HDMI AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AV1 AV R R RS-232C IN (CONTOL & SERVICE) 1 2 DVI-DTV OUTPUT L R

DVD SETUP

Connecting with a Component cable

1 Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the DVD to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO jacks on the TV.
2 Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on the TV.
3 Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
4 Select Component input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.
5 Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with a Component cable - 1

text_image COMPONENT IN AV2 VIDEO Pb Pr Audio R ANTENNA IN 1 2 Y Pb Pb L R

Component Input ports

To achieve better picture quality, connect a DVD player to the component input ports as shown below.

Component ports on the TVY P_B P_R
Video output portson DVD playerY P_B P_R
YB-YR-Y
YCbCr
YPbPr

Connecting with a Euro Scart cable

1 Connect the Euro scart socket of the DVD to the AV1 Euro scart socket on the TV.
2 Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
3 Select AV1 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.

If connected to AV2 Euro scart socket, select AV2 input source.

4 Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions.

ScartInputOutput
VideoAudioRGBVideo, Audio
AV1OOOAnalogue only
AV2OOXAnalogue, DTV, AV1/2/3 output is available.
Current input mode\Output TypeAV1(TV Out)AV2(Monitor Out)AV2(When DTV scheduled recording is in progress using recording equipment.)
Digital TVXOO
Analogue TV, AV1/3OOO(The input mode is converted to DTV.)
Component/RGBOX
HDMIXX
AV2OOO

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with a Euro Scart cable - 1

text_image AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AV1 AV2 COMPONENT IN AUDIO L ANTENNA IN R 1 AUDIO/ VIDEO (A) AUDIO (L)

▶ TV Out : Outputs analogue TV signals.

Monitor Out: Outputs the current screen image.

NOTE

▶ Any Euro scart cable used must be signal shielded.

Connecting with a S-Video cable

(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

1 Connect the S-VIDEO output of the DVD to the S-VIDEO input on the TV.
2 Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the AUDIO input jacks on the TV.
3 Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD.
4 Select AV3 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.
5 Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with a S-Video cable - 1

text_image USB IN HDMI IN 4 S-VIDEO AV IN 3 MONO AUDIO R VIDEO 1 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L R ANT IN ANT OUT

Connecting the HDMI cable

1 Connect the HDMI output of the DVD to the HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI IN 2(Except for 19/22LH20**), HDMI IN 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**) or HDMI IN 4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) jack on the TV.

2 Select HDMI1, HDMI2(Except for 19/22LH20**), HDMI3(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**) or HDMI4(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.

3 Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions.

NOTE

The TV can receive video and audio signals simultaneously when using an HDMI cable.
▶ If the DVD does not support Auto HDMI, you must set the output resolution appropriately.
▶ Check that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher. If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display can result. Please use the latest cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 1

text_image HDMI IN 3 2 1 HDMI DVD OUT AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT RGB IN (PC) RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) HDMI-DVD OUTPUT

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

VCR SETUP

■ To avoid picture noise (interference), allow adequate distance between the VCR and TV.

Connecting with a RF Cable
LG 19LU5000 - VCR SETUP - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Antenna IN"] -->|1| B["ANT OUT"]
    B --> C["S-VIDEO"]
    C --> D["VIDEO L"]
    D --> E["R"]
    B --> F["ANT IN"]
    F --> G["OUTPUT SWITCH 4 3"]
    G --> H["Wall Jack"]
    H --> I["Antenna"]

1 Connect the ANT OUT socket of the VCR to the ANTENNA IN socket on the TV.
2 Connect the antenna cable to the ANT IN socket of the VCR.
3 Press the PLAY button on the VCR and match the appropriate channel between the TV and VCR for viewing.

Connecting with a Euro Scart cable

1 Connect the Euro scart socket of the VCR to the AV1 Euro scart socket on the TV.
2 Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner's manual.)
3 Select AV1 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.
4 If connected to AV2 Euro scart socket, select AV2 input source.

ScartInputOutput
VideoAudioRGBVideo, Audio
AV1OOOAnalogue only
AV2OOXAnalogue, DTV, AV1/2/3 output is available.
Current input mode\Output TypeAV1(TV Out)AV2(Monitor Out)AV2(When DTV scheduled recording is in progress using recording equipment.)
Digital TVXOO
Analogue TV, AV1/3OOO(The input mode is converted to DTV.)
Component/RGBOX
HDMIXX
AV2OOO

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with a Euro Scart cable - 1

text_image OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AV1 AV2 ANTENNA IN R PC R AUDIO 1 AUDIO/ VIDEO (R) AUDIO (L)

▶ TV Out : Outputs analogue TV signals.

Monitor Out: Outputs the current screen image.

NOTE

▶ Any Euro Scart cable used must be signal shielded.

Connecting with a RCA cable

(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**)

1 Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV and VCR. Match the jack colours (Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red)
2 Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner's manual.)
3 Select AV3 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.

NOTE

If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable from the VCR to the AUDIO L/MONO jack of the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 1

text_image LIMONO AUDIO-R VIDEO AV IN 3 1 S-VIDEO VIDEO L R ANT IN OUTPUT SWITCH ANT OUT

Connecting with a S-Video cable

(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

1 Connect the S-VIDEO output of the VCR to the S -VIDEO input on the TV set. The picture quality is improved; compared to normal composite (RCA cable) input.
2 Connect the audio outputs of the VCR to the AUDIO input jacks on the TV.
3 Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner's manual.)
4 Select AV3 input source with using the INPUT button on the remote control.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with a S-Video cable - 1

text_image USB IN HDMI IN 4 S-VIDEO L-MONO-AUDIO-R VIDEO AV IN 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO OUTPUT SWITCH ANT IN ANT OUT

NOTE

▶ If both S-VIDEO and VIDEO sockets have been connected to the S-VHS VCR simultaneously, only the S-VIDEO can be received.

INSERTION OF CI MODULE

  • To view the encrypted (pay) services in digital TV mode.
  • This feature is not available in all countries.

1 Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) CARD SLOT of TV as shown.

For further information, see p.63.

NOTE

▶ Check if the CI module is inserted into the PCMCIA card slot in the right direction. If the module is not inserted properly, this can cause damage to the TV and the PCMCIA card slot.

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 1

text_image PCMCIA CARD SLOT USB IN H-DI11 IN 4 Check this point as shown and insert the CI Module.

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT SETUP

Sending the TV's audio signal to external audio equipment via the Digital Audio Output (Optical) port. If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp).

1 Connect one end of an optical cable to the TV Digital Audio (Optical) Output port.
2 Connect the other end of the optical cable to the digital audio (Optical) input on the audio equipment.
3 Set the "TV Speaker option - Off" in the AUDIO menu.(▶p.119). Refer to the external audio equipment instruction manual for operation.

CAUTION

▶ Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at the laser beam may damage your vision.

LG 19LU5000 - CAUTION - 1

text_image AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AV1 AV2 RGB IN (P RS-232C I (CONTROL & SERVICE) VIDEO AUDIO DVI IN

HEADPHONE SETUP

(Except for 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

You can listen the sound through the headphone.

1 Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.
2 To adjust the headphone volume, press the △ + or - button. If you press the MUTE button, the sound from the headphone is switched off.

LG 19LU5000 - HEADPHONE SETUP - 1

text_image H/PO

OTHER A/V SOURCE SETUP

(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**)

LG 19LU5000 - OTHER A/V SOURCE SETUP - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["PCMCIA CARD S"] -->|USB IN 4| B["S-VIDEO"]
    B --> C["AV IN3"]
    D["Video"] --> E["AMOUNT AUDIO-R"]
    E --> F["AC/DC"]
    G["Camcorder"] --> H["Video Game Set"]
    H --> I["L"]
    H --> J["R"]

1 Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV and external equipment. Match the jack colours. (Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red)
2 Select AV3 input source with using the INPUT button on the remote control.
3 Operate the corresponding external equipment. Refer to external equipment operating guide.

USB SETUP

(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)

LG 19LU5000 - USB SETUP - 1

text_image PCMCIA CAR USB IN Memory Stick

1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN jack on the TV.
2 After connecting the USB IN jack, you use the USB function. (▶ p.82)

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

PC SETUP

This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that the PC adjusts automatically to the TV's settings.

Connecting with a D-sub 15 pin cable

1 Connect the RGB output of the PC to the RGB IN (PC) jack on the TV.
2 Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
3 Turn on the PC and the TV
4 Select RGB input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with a D-sub 15 pin cable - 1

text_image AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AV1 HOMI IN 3 2 1 HOMI/DVI IN RGB IN (PC) 1 2 AUDIO RGB OUTPUT

Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable

1 Connect the DVI output of the PC to the HDMI/DVI IN1 jack on the TV.
2 Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.
3 Turn on the PC and the TV.
4 Select HDMI1 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable - 1

text_image HDMI IN 3 2 1 HDMI AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AV1 AV2 HDMI (PC) RS 232C IN (CONTOL & SERVICE) 1 2 DVI-PC OUTPUT AUDIO

Supported Display Resolution

Plasma TV Models
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode

ResolutionHorizontal Frequency(kHz)Vertical Frequency(Hz)
720x40031.46870.08
640x48031.46959.94
800x60037.87960.31
1024x76848.36360.00
1280x76847.7859.87
1360x76847.7259.80
1920x108066.58759.934
1280x102463.9860.02
1400x105065.31759.979

HDMI/DVI-DTV mode

ResolutionHorizontal Frequency(kHz)Vertical Frequency(Hz)
640x48031.64959.94
31.46960
720x48031.4759.94
31.5060
720x57631.2550.00
1280x72037.5050.00
44.9659.94
45.0060
1920x108028.12550.00
33.7259.94
33.7560
27.0024.00
33.75030
56.2550.00
67.43359.94
67.5060

LCD TV Models
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode

ResolutionHorizontal Frequency(kHz)Vertical Frequency(Hz)
720x40031.46870.08
640x48031.46959.94
800x60037.87960.31
1024x76848.36360.00
1280x76847.7859.87
1360x76847.7259.80
1280x102463.59560.00
1920x1080(RGB-PC)66.58759.93
1920x1080(HDMI-PC)67.560.00

HDMI/DVI-DTV mode

ResolutionHorizontal Frequency(kHz)Vertical Frequency(Hz)
720x48031.469/31.559.94/60
720x57631.2550
1280x72037.550
44.96/4559.94/60
1920x108033.72/33.7559.94/60
28.12550
26.97/2723.97/24
33.716/33.7529.976/30.00
56.2550
67.43/67.559.94/60

NOTE

  • Avoid keeping a fixed image on the set's screen for prolonged periods of time. The fixed image may become permanently imprinted on the screen; use a screen saver when possible.
    There may be interference relating to resolution, vertical pattern, contrast or brightness in PC mode. Change the PC mode to another resolution or change the refresh rate to another rate or adjust the brightness and contrast on the menu until the picture is clear. If the refresh rate of the PC graphic card can not be changed, change the PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer of the PC graphic card.
    ▶ The synchronization input waveform for Horizontal and Vertical frequencies are separate.
    We recommend using 1920x1080, 60Hz(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**), 1360x768, 60Hz(Only 19/22LU40**, 19LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**) for the PC mode, this should provide the best picture quality.
    Connect the signal cable from the monitor output port of the PC to the RGB (PC) port of the TV or the signal cable from the HDMI output port of the PC to the HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) port on the TV.
    ▶ Connect the audio cable from the PC to the Audio input on the TV. (Audio cables are not included with the TV).
    ▶ If using a sound card, adjust PC sound as

required.

This TV uses a VESA Plug and Play Solution. The TV provides EDID data to the PC system with a DDC protocol. The PC adjusts automatically when using this TV.
▶ DDC protocol is preset for RGB (Analogue RGB), HDMI (Digital RGB) mode.
▶ If required, adjust the settings for Plug and Play functionality
If the graphic card on the PC does not output analogue and digital RGB simultaneously, connect only one of either RGB or HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) to display the PC output on the TV.
▶ If the graphic card on the PC does output analogue and digital RGB simultaneously, set the TV to either RGB or HDMI; (the other mode is set to Plug and Play automatically by the TV.)
▶ DOS mode may not work depending on the video card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable.
▶ If you use too long an RGB-PC cable that is too long, there may be interference on the screen. We recommend using under 5m of cable. This provides the best picture quality.

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP

Screen Setup for PC mode

Screen Reset

Returns Position, Size and Phase to the factory default settings.

This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 1

text_image PICTURE Contrast 90 Brightness 50 Sharpness 70 Colour 60 Tint 0 R G Advanced Control Picture Reset Screen

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 2

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 3

text_image SCREEN Resolution Auto Config. Position Size Phase Reset Move Prev. To Set Yes No

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 4

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 5

Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 6

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 7

Select Screen.

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 8

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 9

Select Reset.

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 10

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 11

Select Yes.

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Reset - 12

Run Reset.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase

If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment and especially if characters are still trembling, adjust the picture phase manually.

This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase - 1

text_image PICTURE • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Tint 0 R G • Advanced Control • Picture Reset Screen

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase - 2

text_image SCREEN Resolution Auto Config. Position Size Phase Reset Move Prev.

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase - 3

Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase - 4

Select Screen.

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase - 5

Select Position, Size or Phase.

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase - 6

Make appropriate adjustments.

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase - 7

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

Selecting Resolution

To view a normal picture, match the resolution of RGB mode and selection of PC mode.

This function works in the following mode: RGB[PC]

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 1

text_image PICTURE Contrast 90 Brightness 50 Sharpness 70 Colour 60 Tint 0 R G Advanced Control Picture Reset Screen SCREEN Resolution 1024 x 768 Auto Config. 1280 x 768 Position 1360 x 768 Size Phase Reset

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 2

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 3

Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 4

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 5

Select Screen.

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 6

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 7

Select Resolution.

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 8

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 9

Select the desired resolution.

LG 19LU5000 - Selecting Resolution - 10

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

Auto Configure (RGB [PC] mode only)

Automatically adjusts the picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the image is still not correct, your TV is functioning properly but needs further adjustment.

Auto configure

This function is for automatic adjustment of the screen position, size, and phase The displayed image will be unstable for a few seconds while the auto configuration is in progress.

LG 19LU5000 - Auto configure - 1

text_image PICTURE • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Tint 0 R G • Advanced Control • Picture Reset Screen

LG 19LU5000 - Auto configure - 2

text_image SCREEN Resolution Auto Config. Position Size Phase Reset Move Prev. To Set Yes No

LG 19LU5000 - Auto configure - 3

Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - Auto configure - 4

Select Screen.

LG 19LU5000 - Auto configure - 5

Select Auto Config..

LG 19LU5000 - Auto configure - 6

Select Yes.

LG 19LU5000 - Auto configure - 7

Run Auto Config..

  • If the position of the image is still not correct, try Auto adjustment again.
  • If picture needs to be adjusted again after Auto adjustment in RGB (PC), you can adjust the Position, Size or Phase.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.

  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS

(Only 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS - 1

text_image ENERGY SAVING Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV. RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture. POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby. INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence. TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel. Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect Ratio, Clear Voice II, Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep Timer, Favourite, USB Device).(► p.51) MENU Selects a menu. Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu. GUIDE Shows programme schedule.(► p.96) THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and adjust the system settings to your preference. OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode. RETURN(EXIT) Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction function. INFO i Shows the present screen information. AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices.(► p.72) Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT buttons models only), Programme edit. TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext. BUTTONS For further details, see the 'Teletext' section.(► p.135) SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode. SIMPLINK See a list of AV devices connected to TV. When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu appears at the screen.(► p.69)

LG 19LU5000 - REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS - 2

text_image ENERGY SAVING e0 POWER INPUT RATIO TV/RAD Q MENU MENU GUIDE OK RETURN INFO AV MODE EXIT MARK FAV P MUTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LIST 0 Q.VIEW TITLE TEXT T.OPT SUBTITLE TITLE T.OPT SUBTITLE FREEZE

VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.

/DOWN

MARK Check and un-check programmes in the USB menu.

FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.

MUTE Switches the sound on or off.

Programme Selects a programme.

UP/DOWN

PAGE UP/DOWN Move from one full set of screen information to the next one.

0\~9 number Selects a programme.

button Selects numbered items in a menu.

LIST Displays the programme table.

Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.

SIMPLINK / Controls SIMPLINK or USB menu(Photo List and Music

USB Menu List or Movie List (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**,

control buttons 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**,

50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)).

FREEZE Pause the present picture at the screen.(Plasma TV only)

Installing Batteries

LG 19LU5000 - Installing Batteries - 1

natural_image Illustration of hands holding a device with a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)
  • Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).
    ■ Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones.
  • Close cover.

REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS

(Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)

When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS - 1

text_image TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel. AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices.(► p.72) POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby. INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence. ENERGY SAVING Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV. 0~9 number Selects a programme. button Selects numbered items in a menu. Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme. LIST Displays the programme table. THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and adjust the system settings to your preference. OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode. MENU Selects a menu. Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu. RETURN(EXIT) Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction function. Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT buttons models only), Programme edit. 1 TELETEXT Buttons These buttons are used for teletext. FOR further details, see the 'Teletext' section.(► p.135) SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode. SIMPLINK See a list of AV devices connected to TV. When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu appears at the screen.(► p.69)

LG 19LU5000 - REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS - 2

text_image VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume. /DOWN MUTE Switches the sound on or off. Programme Selects a programme. UP/DOWN PAGE Move from one full set of screen information to the next UP/DOWN one. SIMPLINK Controls SIMPLINK. control buttons Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep Timer, Favourite, Energy Saving.)(► p.51) INFO i Shows the present screen information. GUIDE Shows programme schedule.(► p.96) FAV Displays the selected favourite programme. MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings. Installing Batteries ■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -). ■ Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones. ■ Close cover.

TURNING ON THE TV

- When your TV is turned on, you will be able to use its features.

1 Firstly, connect the power cord correctly and check the main power on the TV. At this stage, the TV switches to standby mode.
2 In standby mode to turn TV on, press the INPUT or P ▲ ▼ (or P ∧ ∨) button on the TV or press the POWER, INPUT, P ∧ ∨ or NUMBER button on the remote control and the TV will switch on.

Initializing setup

If the OSD (On Screen Display) is displayed on the screen after turning on the TV, you can adjust the Language, Mode Setting, Country, Auto Tuning.

Note:

a. If you close without completing the initial setting, the Initial Setting menu can be displayed again.
b. Press the RETURN button to change the current OSD to the previous OSD.
c. For those countries without confirmed DTV broadcasting standards, some DTV features might not work, depending on the DTV broadcasting environment.
d. "Home Use" mode is the optimal setting for home environments, and is the TV's default mode.
e. "Store Demo" mode is the optimal setting for store environments. If a user modifies image quality data, "Store Demo" mode initializes the product to the image quality set by us after a certain period of time.
f. The mode (Home Use, Store Demo) can be changed by executing Mode Setting in the OPTION menu.

PROGRAMME SELECTION

1 Press the P ^ ∨ or NUMBER buttons to select a programme number.

VOLUME ADJUSTMENT

1 Press the △ + or - button to adjust the volume.

If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.

You can cancel this function by pressing the MUTE, △ + , - or AV Mode button.

QUICK MENU

Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.

Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.

Aspect Ratio: Selects your desired picture format. For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After completing Zoom Setting, the display goes back to Q.Menu.
Clear Voice II : By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better.
Picture Mode : Selects your desired Picture Mode.
Sound Mode: It is a feature to automatically set the sound combination which it deems the best for the images being watched. Selects your desired Sound Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - QUICK MENU - 1

pie | Category | Aspect Ratio | | -------- | ------------ | | Camera | 16:9 | | Head | | | Video | | | Person | | | Phone | | | Audio | | | Wireless | | | Audio | | | Note | |

(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)

(M) Audio : Selects the sound output.
^7z Sleep Timer: Sets the sleep timer.
PR Favourite : Selects the favourite programme.
USB Device : Selects "Eject" in order to eject USB device.(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)
e0 Energy Saving : Selects your desired Energy Saving mode. (Only19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)

LG 19LU5000 - QUICK MENU - 2

pie | Category | Aspect Ratio | | -------- | ------------ | | e | 16:9 | | PR | 16:9 | | z | 16:9 | | M | 16:9 | | speaker | 16:9 | | profile | 16:9 | | human head | 16:9 |

(Only19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)

LG 19LU5000 - QUICK MENU - 3

LG 19LU5000 - QUICK MENU - 4

Display each menu.

LG 19LU5000 - QUICK MENU - 5

Select your desired Source.

LG 19LU5000 - QUICK MENU - 6

  • Press the Q.MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.

LG 19LU5000 - WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SETUP"] --> B["Auto Tuning"]
    A --> C["Manual Tuning"]
    A --> D["Programme Edit"]
    A --> E["Booster : Off"]
    A --> F["Software Update : On"]
    A --> G["Diagnostics"]
    A --> H["CI Information"]

    I["PICTURE"] --> J["Aspect Ratio : 16:9"]
    I --> K["Picture Wizard"]
    I --> L["Energy Saving : Off"]
    I --> M["Picture Mode : Standard"]
    I --> N["Backlight 70"]
    I --> O["Contrast 90"]
    I --> P["Brightness 50"]
    I --> Q["Sharpness 70"]

    R["AUDIO"] --> S["Auto Volume : Off"]
    R --> T["Clear Voice II : Off"]
    R --> U["Level 3"]
    R --> V["Balance 0"]
    R --> W["Sound Mode : Standard"]
    R --> X["SRS TruSurround XT : Off"]
    R --> Y["Treble 50"]
    R --> Z["Bass 50"]

    AA["OPTION"] --> AB["Menu Language : English"]
    AA --> AC["Audio Language : English"]
    AA --> AD["Subtitle Language : English"]
    AA --> AE["Hard of Hearing(□) : Off"]
    AA --> AF["Country : UK"]
    AA --> AG["Input Label"]
    AA --> AH["SIMPLINK : On"]
    AA --> AI["Key Lock : Off"]

    AJ["SETUP"] --> AK["OPTION"]
    AJ --> AL["LOCK"]
    AJ --> AM["BLUETOOTH"]
    AJ --> AN["USB"]

    AO["TIME"] --> AP["Clock"]
    AO --> AQ["Off Time : Off"]
    AO --> AR["On Time : Off"]
    AO --> AS["Sleep Timer : Off"]

    AT["INPUT"] --> AU["(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)"]
    AT --> AV["(Only 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**)"]
    AT --> AW["(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20, 32/37/42/47LH30**)"]

    AX["OR"] --> AY["AND/OR INPUT"]
    AX --> AZ["AND/OR OUTPUT"]

    BA["BUETOOTH"] --> BB["AND/OR LOCK"]

    BC["INPUT"] --> BD["AND/OR OUTPUT"]

    BE["USB"] --> BF["AND/OR OUTPUT"]

    BG["KEY"] --> BH["NOT FOR INPUT"]

    BI["KEY"] --> BJ["NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    BK["KEY"] --> BL["NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    BM["KEY"] --> BN["NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    BO["KEY"] --> BP["NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    BQ["OK"] --> BR["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    BS["OK"] --> BT["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    BU["OK"] --> BV["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    BW["OK"] --> BX["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    BY["OK"] --> BZ["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    CA["OK"] --> CB["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    CC["OK"] --> CD["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DE["OK"] --> DF["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DG["OK"] --> DH["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DI["OK"] --> DJ["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DK["OK"] --> DL["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DV["OK"] --> DW["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DX["OK"] --> DXA["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXB["OK"] --> DXB1["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXC["OK"] --> DXC1["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXD["OK"] --> DXD1A["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXE["OK"] --> DXE1["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXF["OK"] --> DXF1A["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXG["OK"] --> DXG1A1["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXH["OK"] --> DXH1A1A["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXI["OK"] --> DXI1A1A1["OK / NOT FOR OUTPUT"]

    DXJ["OK"] --> DXJ1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1A1B0

LG 19LU5000 - WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT - 2

LG 19LU5000 - WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT - 3

Display each menu.

LG 19LU5000 - WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT - 4

LG 19LU5000 - WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT - 5

Select a menu item.

LG 19LU5000 - WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT - 6

Move to the pop up menu.

  • Press the INFO button, you can check the Simple Manual Menu.
  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

LG 19LU5000 - WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT - 7

NOTE

▶ It is possible to use ISM Method in Plasma TV models only.
▶ It is possible to use Backlight, Power Indicator in LCD TV models only.
▶ It is not possible to use CI Information in Analogue mode.
▶ It is not possible to use Booster in Analogue mode.(Except for 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING

(Plasma TV Models & For countries other than Finland and Sweden in LCD TV Models)

Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes.

When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING - 2

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING - 3

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update Diagnostics CI Information Check your antenna connection. The previous channel information will be updated during Auto Tuning. SECAM L Search Automatic Numbering Start Close

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING - 4

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING - 5

Select Auto Tuning.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING - 6

Select Start.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING - 7

Run Auto tuning.

  • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System 'On'.
  • If you wish to keep on auto tuning select Start using the ^ ∨ button. Then, press the OK button. Otherwise select Close.
  • Automatic Numbering: Decide whether to use the programme numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.

  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.
  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING

(Only for Finland and Sweden in LCD TV Models)

DVB-C Auto Tuning is a menu for users in countries that support DVB cable.

Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes.

When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted.

If you want to select the Antenna,

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Antenna, - 1

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Antenna, - 2
Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Antenna, - 3
Select Auto Tuning.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Antenna, - 4
Select Antenna.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Antenna, - 5
Select Start.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Antenna, - 6
Run Auto tuning.

  • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System 'On'.
  • If you wish to keep on auto tuning select Start using the ^ ∨ button. Then, press the OK button. Otherwise select Close.
  • Automatic Numbering: Decide whether to use the programme numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.

  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

If you want to select the Cable,

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 2

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update Diagnostics CI Information Please select your TV Connection. Antenna Cable Close

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 3

text_image Default Frequency(kHz) 362000 Symbol rate(kS/s) 6875 Modulation 640AM Network ID 0 OK Close

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 4
Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 5
Select Auto Tuning.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 6
Select Cable.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 7

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 8
Make appropriate adjustments.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 9

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 10
Select Start.

LG 19LU5000 - If you want to select the Cable, - 11
Run Auto tuning.

  • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System 'On'.
  • If you wish to keep on auto tuning select OK using the ^ ∨ button. Then, press the OK button. Otherwise select Close.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.

  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

The following values are needed in order to search all available programmes quickly and correctly.

The commonly used values are provided as "default",

However, for correct settings, please inquire of the cable service provider.

• Frequency : Enter a user-defined frequency range.
- Symbol rate : Enter a user-defined symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at which a device such as modem sends symbols to a channel).
- Modulation: Enter a user-defined modulation. (Modulation: Loading of audio or video signals onto carrier).
• Network ID(Sweden only) : Unique identifier allotted for each user.

MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE)

Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list.

(Plasma TV Models & For countries other than Finland and Sweden in LCD TV Models & When selecting Antenna if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models)

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 2

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update Diagnostics CI Information DTV Your receiver will add this channel to your channel list. UHF CH. 30 Bad Normal Good Update Close

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 3

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 4

Select Manual Tuning.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 5

Select DTV.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 6

Select the desired channel number.

- Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System 'On'.

(When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models)

LG 19LU5000 - (When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models) - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - (When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models) - 2

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update Diagnostics CI Information DTV Frequency(kHz) 362000 Symbol rate(kS/s) 6875 Modulation 640AM Bad Normal Good Add Close

LG 19LU5000 - (When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models) - 3

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - (When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models) - 4

Make appropriate adjustments.

LG 19LU5000 - (When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models) - 5

Select Manual Tuning.

- Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System 'On'.

LG 19LU5000 - (When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models) - 6

Select DTV.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

Frequency, Symbol rate, and Modulation mode are needed in order to add a programme correctly in DVB cable mode.

Please inquire of the cable service provider about the correct values.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE)

Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange the stations in whatever order you desire.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["SETUP"] --> B["Auto Tuning"]
    B --> C["Manual Tuning"]
    C --> D["Programme Edit"]
    D --> E["Software Update : On"]
    E --> F["Diagnostics"]
    F --> G["CI Information"]

    H["SETUP"] --> I["Auto Tuning"]
    I --> J["Manual Tuning"]
    J --> K["Programme Edit"]
    K --> L["Software Update : On"]
    L --> M["Diagnostics"]
    M --> N["CI Information"]

    O["TV"] --> P["Storage 3"]
    O --> Q["System BG"]
    O --> R["Band V/UHF"]
    O --> S["Channel 0"]
    O --> T["Fine ◀▶"]
    O --> U["Search ◀▶"]
    O --> V["Name C 02"]
    V --> W["Store"]
    V --> X["Close"]

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 2

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 3

Select Manual Tuning.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 4

Select TV.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 5

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 6

Select the desired pro- gramme number on.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 7

Select a TV system.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 8

Select V/UHF or Cable.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 9

or Select the desired channel number.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 10

Commence searching.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 11

Select Store.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

  • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System 'On'.
    • L : SECAM L/L' (France)

BG : PAL B/G, SECAM B/G (Europe / East Europe / Asia / New Zealand / M.East / Africa / Australia)

I : PAL I/II (U.K. / Ireland / Hong Kong / South Africa)

DK : PAL D/K, SECAM D/K (East Europe / China / Africa / CIS)

- To store another channel, repeat steps 4 to 9.

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 12

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) - 13

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update Diagnostics CI Information TV Storage 3 System BG Band V/UHF Channel 0 Fine ◀▶ Search ◀▶ Name C 02 Store Close

■ Assigning a station name

You can assign a station name with five characters to each programme number.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Assigning a station name - 1

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Assigning a station name - 2

Select Manual Tuning.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Assigning a station name - 3

Select TV.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Assigning a station name - 4

Select Name.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Assigning a station name - 5

Select the position and make your choice of the second character, and so on.

You can use an the alphabet A to Z, the number 0 to 9, +/- , and blank.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Assigning a station name - 6

Select Close.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Assigning a station name - 7

Select Store.

■ Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70\*\*, 50/60PS70\*\*, 50/60PS80\*\*)

Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception is poor.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70\*\*, 50/60PS70\*\*, 50/60PS80\*\*) - 1

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70\*\*, 50/60PS70\*\*, 50/60PS80\*\*) - 2

Select Manual Tuning.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70\*\*, 50/60PS70\*\*, 50/60PS80\*\*) - 3

Select TV.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70\*\*, 50/60PS70\*\*, 50/60PS80\*\*) - 4

Select Fine.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70\*\*, 50/60PS70\*\*, 50/60PS80\*\*) - 5

Fine tune for the best picture and sound.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70\*\*, 50/60PS70\*\*, 50/60PS80\*\*) - 6

Select Store.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

PROGRAMME EDIT

When a programme number is skipped, it means that you will be unable to select it using P ^ ∨ button during TV viewing.

If you wish to select the skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the Programme edit menu.

This function enables you to skip the stored programmes.

You can change the programme number using “Move” function, if “Automatic Numbering” is unchecked when you start Auto Tuning.

LG 19LU5000 - PROGRAMME EDIT - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information 1 YLE TV1 DTV RADIO TV 1 YLE TV1 2 YLE TV2 4 TV4 Stockholm 5 YLE FST 6 CNN 8 YLE24 9 YLE Teema 14 TV4 Film 24 TV4 Fakta 50 TV400 24 TV4 Fakta 84 Kanal Lokal 24 TV4 Fakta 86 Info/3sat 87 Doku/Kika 88 TVE 1 Pr. Change Navigation Page Change Previous Skip

LG 19LU5000 - PROGRAMME EDIT - 2

LG 19LU5000 - PROGRAMME EDIT - 3

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - PROGRAMME EDIT - 4

LG 19LU5000 - PROGRAMME EDIT - 5

Select Programme Edit.

LG 19LU5000 - PROGRAMME EDIT - 6

Enter the Programme Edit.

LG 19LU5000 - PROGRAMME EDIT - 7

Select a programme to be stored or skipped.

- Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System 'On'.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

IN DTV/RADIO MODE

■ Skipping a programme number

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Skipping a programme number - 1

Select a programme number to be skipped.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Skipping a programme number - 2

Turn the programme number to blue.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Skipping a programme number - 3

Release.

- When programmes are to be skipped, the skipped programme shows in blue and these programmes will not be selected by the P ∧ ∨ buttons during TV viewing.

- If you wish to select a skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the programme edit or EPG.

IN TV MODE

This function enables you to delete or skip the stored programmes.

You can also move some channels and use other programme numbers.

■ Deleting a programme

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Deleting a programme - 1

Select a programme number to be deleted.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Deleting a programme - 2

Turn the programme number to red.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Deleting a programme - 3

Delete.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Deleting a programme - 4

Release.

- The selected programme is deleted, all the following programmes are shifted up one

■ Moving a programme

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Moving a programme - 1

Select a programme number to be moved.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Moving a programme - 2

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Moving a programme - 3

Turn the programme number to green.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Moving a programme - 4

Release.

■ Auto Sort

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Auto Sort - 1

Start Auto Sort.

- After activating Auto Sort once, you can no longer edit programmes.

■ Skipping a programme number

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Skipping a programme number - 1

Select a programme number to be skipped.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Skipping a programme number - 2

Turn the programme number to blue.

- When a programme number is skipped it means that you will be unable to select it using the P ^ ∨ button during normal TV viewing.

- If you wish to select a skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the programme edit or EPG.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Skipping a programme number - 3

Release.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE)

(Except for 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

If reception is poor select Booster to On.

When the signal is strong, select "Off".

LG 19LU5000 - BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Booster : On Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 2

LG 19LU5000 - BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 3

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Booster Software Update Diagnostics CI Information Off On

LG 19LU5000 - BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 4

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 5

Select Booster.

LG 19LU5000 - BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 6

Select On or Off.

LG 19LU5000 - BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE) - 7

Save.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SOFTWARE UPDATE

Software Update means software can be downloaded through the digital terrestrial broadcasting system.

LG 19LU5000 - SOFTWARE UPDATE - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - SOFTWARE UPDATE - 2

LG 19LU5000 - SOFTWARE UPDATE - 3

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update Off On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - SOFTWARE UPDATE - 4
Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - SOFTWARE UPDATE - 5
Select Software Update.

LG 19LU5000 - SOFTWARE UPDATE - 6

Select On or Off.

- If you select On, a user confirm message box will be displayed to notify that new software is found.

LG 19LU5000 - Select On or Off. - 1

\* When setting "Software Update"

Occasionally, a transmission of updated digital software information will result in the following menu on the TV screen.

Select the Yes using the < > button and you will see the following picture.

After the Software Update is complete, the System restarts.

LG 19LU5000 - \* When setting "Software Update" - 1

text_image Software update is available. Would you like to download now? (approximately 30 Min ~ 2 hours) Your TV software is updated when you turn off the TV using the remote control or local key. Do not unplug! Yes No

Simple Update : for current update stream

LG 19LU5000 - \* When setting "Software Update" - 2

bar | Status | Value | | ---------- | ------- | | Software downloading progress. | 65% | | Ver. ff.ff.ff.ff. | 0.20100 |

LG 19LU5000 - \* When setting "Software Update" - 3

LG 19LU5000 - \* When setting "Software Update" - 4

text_image The new software is updated at the time below. 00/00/0 00:00 Would you like to download now? Yes No

Schedule Update : for scheduled update stream

When the Software Update menu is "Off", the message to change it to "On" appears.

When the power is turned off, downloading starts.

When the power is turned on while updating, the progress status is displayed.

- During Progress of a Software Update, please note the following:

  • Power to the TV must not be interrupted.
  • The TV must not be switched off.
  • The antenna must not be disconnected.
  • After Software Update, you can confirm the updated software version in Diagnostics menu.
  • It may take hours to download the software, so make sure that the power stays on during the download.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

DIAGNOSTICS

This function enables you to view information on the Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and Software Version.

This displays the information and signal strength of the tuned *MUX.

This displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX.

(*MUX: A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting (a single MUX contains multiple channels.))

LG 19LU5000 - DIAGNOSTICS - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information Engineering Diagnostics Manufacturer : LG Electronics Inc. Model/Type : 42LH7000 Serial No. : SKJY1107 Software Version : V1.10.00 CH 30 CH 34 CH 36 CH 38 CH 54 CH 60 Prev. Popup MENU Exit

LG 19LU5000 - DIAGNOSTICS - 2

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - DIAGNOSTICS - 3

Select Diagnostics.

LG 19LU5000 - DIAGNOSTICS - 4

Display Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and Software Version.

LG 19LU5000 - DIAGNOSTICS - 5

Display the information of Channel.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION

This function enables you to watch some encrypted services (pay services). If you remove the CI Module, you cannot watch pay services.

When the module is inserted into the CI slot, you can access the module menu.

To purchase a module and smart card, contact your dealer. Do not repeatedly insert or remove a CI module from the TV. This may cause a malfunction. When the TV is turned on after inserting a CI Module, you may not have any sound output.

This may be incompatible with the CI module and smart card.

CI (Common Interface) functions may not be possible depending upon the country broadcasting circumstances.

LG 19LU5000 - CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION - 1

text_image SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information

LG 19LU5000 - CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION - 2

LG 19LU5000 - CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION - 3

text_image Viaccess Module Consultations Authorizations Module information Select the item
  • This OSD is only for illustration and the menu options and screen format will vary according to the Digital pay services provider.
  • It is possible for you to change CI (Common Interface) menu screen and service by consulting your dealer.

LG 19LU5000 - CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION - 4

Select SETUP.

LG 19LU5000 - CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION - 5

Select CI Information.

LG 19LU5000 - CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION - 6

Select the desired item: Module information, smart card information, language, or software download etc.

LG 19LU5000 - CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION - 7

Save.

- Press the RETURN button to return to normal TV viewing.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

SELECTING THE PROGRAMME LIST

You can check which programmes are stored in the memory by displaying the programme list.

Mini Glossary

LG 19LU5000 - Mini Glossary - 1

Displayed when the Locked Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - Mini Glossary - 2

text_image Programme List DTV 1 BBC DTV 2 BBC DTV 3 BBC Exit

Displaying programme LIST

LG 19LU5000 - Displaying programme LIST - 1

Display the Programme List.

  • You may find some blue programmes. These have been set up to be skipped by auto programming or in the programme edit mode.
  • Some programmes with the channel number shown in the programme LIST indicate there is no station name assigned.

■ Selecting a programme in the programme list

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting a programme in the programme list - 1

Select a programme.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting a programme in the programme list - 2

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting a programme in the programme list - 3

Switch to the chosen programme number.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting a programme in the programme list - 4

The mode will be switched between TV, DTV, and Radio from the program you are currently watching.

■ Paging through a programme list

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Paging through a programme list - 1

Turn the pages.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Paging through a programme list - 2

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Paging through a programme list - 3

Return to normal TV viewing.

FAVOURITE PROGRAMME SETUP

■ Selecting favourite programme

Favorite programmes is a convenient feature that lets you quickly scan up to programmes of your choice without having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in-between programmes.

To tune to a favorite programme, press the FAV(Favorite)button repeatedly.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting favourite programme - 1

text_image Favourite PR Favourite

(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting favourite programme - 2

text_image Favourite PR Favourite

(Only19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting favourite programme - 3

or
LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting favourite programme - 4
Select your desired programme.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting favourite programme - 5
Select Favourite.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting favourite programme - 6

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting favourite programme - 7
Select Favourite.

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Selecting favourite programme - 8
Return to TV viewing.

- This will automatically include the selected programme into your favourite programme list.

■ Displaying the favourite programme list

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Displaying the favourite programme list - 1

text_image Favourite List DTV 1 BBC DTV 2 BBC DTV 3 BBC Exit

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Displaying the favourite programme list - 2
Display the Favourite Programme List.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

INPUT LIST

HDMI and AV1, 2 (SCART) can be recognized by a detect pin and thus enabled only when an external device approves voltage.

By using TV/RAD button, you can move from External Input to RF Input and to the last watched programme in DTV/RADIO/TV mode.

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LIST - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Antenna"] --> B["AV1"]
    B --> C["AV2"]
    C --> D["AV3"]
    D --> E["Component"]
    F["HDMI4"] --> G["HDMI3"]
    G --> H["HDMI2"]
    H --> I["HDMI1"]
    I --> J["RGB"]
    K["(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)"] --> L["(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**)"]

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LIST - 2

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LIST - 3

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LIST - 4

Select the input source.

  • Antenna or Cable : Select it when watching the DTV/TV. (Digital cable input is available only at Finland and Sweden in LCD TV Models.)
  • AV1, AV2, AV3 : Select it when watching the VCR or external equipment.
  • Component : Select it when using the DVD or the Digital set-top box depends on connector.
  • RGB :Select it when using PC depends on connector.
  • HDMI1, HDMI2 (Except for 19/22LH20**), HDMI3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**), HDMI4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**): Select it when using DVD, PC or Digital set-top box depend on connector.

INPUT LABEL

Selects a label for each input source.

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LABEL - 1

text_image OPTION Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Hard of Hearing(...): Off Country : UK Input Label SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LABEL - 2

text_image OPTION Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Hard of Hearing(□) : Off Country : UK Input Label SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Move AV1 AV2 AV3 Component RGB HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 Close (Except for 19/22LH20*) (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32'/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25*) (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LABEL - 3

Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LABEL - 4

Select Input Label.

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LABEL - 5

Select the source.

LG 19LU5000 - INPUT LABEL - 6

Select the label.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

SIMPLE MANUAL

You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV. During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted.

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 1

text_image OPTION Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Hard of Hearing(□) : Off Country : UK Input Label SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 2

text_image REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS WATCHING TV /PROGRAMME CONTROL When using the remote control, aim it directly at the TV. • Q. MENU Selects the desired quick menu function. (Aspect Ratio, Clear Voice II, Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep Timer, Favourite, USB Eject.) • MENU Selects a menu. Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu. • VOLUME UP/DOWN Adjusts the volume. • Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme. Installing Batteries • Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -). • Install two 1.5V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones. • Close cover.

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 3

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 4

Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 5

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 6

Select Simple Manual.

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 7

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 8

Select the part of the manual you want to see.

- Press the RETURN button to return to normal TV viewing.

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLE MANUAL - 9

This function operates only with devices with the SIMPLINK logo.

Please check the SIMPLINK logo.

This TV might not function properly when using it with other products with HDMI-CEC function.

This allows you to control and play other AV devices connected to the display through HDMI cable without additional cables and settings.

If you do not want SIMPLINK menu, select "Off".

SIMPLINK function is not supported by HDMI IN 4(Only 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) input.

LG 19LU5000 - MPLINK - 1

text_image OPTION Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Hard of Hearing(□) : Off Country : UK Input Label SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off OPTION Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Hard of Hearing(□) : Off Country : UK Input Label SIMPLINK Off On Key Lock : Off

LG 19LU5000 - MPLINK - 2

Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - MPLINK - 3

Select SIMPLINK.

LG 19LU5000 - MPLINK - 4

Select On or Off.

LG 19LU5000 - MPLINK - 5

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

1 Connect the HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 (Except for 19/22LH20**), HDMI IN 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**) or HDMI IN 4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**) terminal on the back of the TV and the HDMI output terminal of the Home Theater using HDMI cables.

2 Connect the Digital Audio output terminal on the back of the TV and the Digital Audio input terminal of the Home Theater using optical cables.

3 Select Home Theater in the Speaker menu by pushing the SIMPLINK button.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting to Home Theater with the SIMPLINK logo. - 1

text_image HDMI IN 3 2 1 HOM AUDIO IN (RGB/DVI) AV1 AV2 RGB IN (P) RS-232C IN (CONTROLS & SERIES) AUDIO VIDEO COMPONENT IN R ANTENNA IN HDMI OUTPUT DIGITAL AUDIO IN

Home Theater

▶ When you select or operate a media device with home theater function, the speaker automatically switches to home theater speaker (HT speaker).

NOTE

Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the rear terminal (HDMI terminal) of the SIMPLINK device with the HDMI cable.
▶ When you switch the Input source using the INPUT button on the remote control, you can stop the operation of a device controlled by SIMPLINK.

Disc playback

Control connected AV devices by pressing the ^ ∨ < > , OK, ▶, ■, ||, ◀◀ and ▶▶ buttons.

Direct Play

After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media without additional settings.

Select AV device

Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV and operate it.

Power off all devices

When you switch off the TV, all connected devices are turned off.

Switch audio-out

Offers an easy way to switch audio-out.

Sync Power on

When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play, The TV will change automatically to turn on mode.

* A device, which is connected to the TV through an HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK, does not provide this function.
Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an HDMI cable over Version 1.3 with *CEC function should be used. (*CEC: Consumer Electronics Control).

Press the ^ ∨ < > button and then OK button to select the desired SIMPLINK source.

1 TV viewing : Switch to the previous TV programme regardless of the current mode.
② DISC playback : Select and play connected discs. When multiple discs are available, the titles of discs are conveniently displayed at the bottom of the screen.
③ VCR playback : Play and control the connected VCR.
4 HDD Recordings playback : Play and control recordings stored in HDD.
5 Audio Out to Home theater/Audio Out to TV: Select Home theater or TV speaker for Audio Out.

LG 19LU5000 - SIMPLINK Menu - 1

text_image SIMPLINK 1 2 3 4 5 Selected Device DISC1 DVD-R/VCR VCR HDD Recorder Speaker TV Speaker When device is not connected (displayed in gray) When a device is connected (displayed in bright colour) Change Device OK

• Home theater: Only one supported at a time
- DVD, Recorder: Up to one(19/22LH20**), two(19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**), three(32/37/42/47LH30**, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 26LU50**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) or four(32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**) supported at a time.
• VCR: Only one supported at a time

WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL

AV MODE

You can select the optimal images and sounds when connecting AV devices to external input.

Off Disables the AV MODE.

Cinema Optimizes video and audio for watching movies.

Sport Optimizes video and audio for watching sports events.

Game Optimizes video and audio for playing games.

LG 19LU5000 - AV MODE - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Off"] --> B["Cinema"]
    B --> C["Sport"]
    C --> D["Game"]
    D --> A

LG 19LU5000 - AV MODE - 2

Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.

LG 19LU5000 - AV MODE - 3

  • If you select Cinema in AV mode, Cinema will be selected both for Picture Mode and Sound Mode in PICTURE menu and AUDIO menu respectively.
  • If you select "Off" in AV mode, the picture and image which you initially set will be selected.

INITIALIZING

(RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS)

This function initializes all settings.

But the settings of isf Day and isf Night of the Picture Mode cannot be initialized.

It is useful to initialize the product or when you move to other city or country.

When the Factory Reset is completed, you must restart the Initializing setup.

When the Lock System menu is "On", the message to enter the password appears.

LG 19LU5000 - (RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS) - 1

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID : 1 Power Indicator Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Demo Factory Reset

LG 19LU5000 - (RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS) - 2

LG 19LU5000 - (RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS) - 3

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID Power In Demo M Mode Se Factory Re All user settings and channel settings will be reset. Still Continue? Yes No

LG 19LU5000 - (RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS) - 4

Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - (RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS) - 5

Select Factory Reset.

LG 19LU5000 - (RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS) - 6

Select Yes.

LG 19LU5000 - (RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS) - 7

Start Factory Reset.

- In Lock System "On", if you forget your password, press '7', '7', '7', '7' on the remote control handset.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.
  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

Bluetooth?

Bluetooth is a short distance networking technology using 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various types of information devices such as computers, cell phones and PDAs, as well as digital appliances through wireless connection, without having to connect any cable, to enable data exchange.

With the Bluetooth communication function, you can connect the Bluetooth enabled wireless headset or receive images(only JPEG), listen to music from the Bluetooth enabled cell phone using this TV.

  • Communication Spec.: Bluetooth Specification Version 2.0 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
    • Output: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 2
    • Maximum Communication Range: Line of open sight approx. 10 m (30 ft)
  • Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz band (2.4 GHz \~ 2.4835 GHz)
  • Bluetooth Module: EAX57538201 (LG Electronics)
  • Compatible Bluetooth Profile : GAVDP(Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile)
    A2DP(Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
    HSP(Headset Profile)
    OPP(Object Push Profile)
    BIP(Basic Imaging Profile)
    FTP(File Transfer Profile)

C€0678

Precautions when using the Bluetooth

▶ Use within 10m(-45°\~45°) range.
If you use the device out of the range or within the range with obstacles, it can result in communication error.
▶ Communication error can occur depending on the surrounding devices.
▶ Products using the same frequency of 2.4 GHz (Wireless LAN, microwave oven etc.), can cause communication error by using the same frequency bandwidth.
The device search time differs depending on the number of Bluetooth devices and the operating situation.
The probability of search increases with less number of devices.
Electromagnetic wave can be interfered with applicable wireless devices.
Because applicable wireless devices have the possibility of electromagnetic wave interference, they cannot provide services related to human life.
▶ You can only connect one Bluetooth device at a time.
▶ You cannot receive photos(only JPEG) or listen to music from other Bluetooth devices while using the Bluetooth headset.
For details of Bluetooth, refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth device.
▶ USB (Photo List, Music List, Movie List(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) and Bluetooth will not be supported at the same time.
▶ Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause (harmful) interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation (of the device).

QDID(Qualified Design Identity) : B014836

SETTING THE BLUETOOTH

If you want to listen to the broadcasted sound using the Bluetooth headset or receive the jpeg images from an external device and view them on the TV, listen to music from cell phone(Bluetooth device), you can use the wireless communication without having to connect any cables.

You can use the BLUETOOTH menu by selecting "On".

If you do not want to use the Bluetooth function, select "Off".

If it is connected to the external Bluetooth device, you can select "Off" after disconnecting the device.

LG 19LU5000 - SETTING THE BLUETOOTH - 1

text_image BLUETOOTH Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info. BLUETOOTH Bluetooth TV PIN Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info. Move OK Move OK Off On

LG 19LU5000 - SETTING THE BLUETOOTH - 2

Select BLUETOOTH.

LG 19LU5000 - SETTING THE BLUETOOTH - 3

Select Bluetooth.

LG 19LU5000 - SETTING THE BLUETOOTH - 4

Select On or Off.

LG 19LU5000 - SETTING THE BLUETOOTH - 5

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

TO USE THE BLUETOOTH

SET TV PIN

To accept connection from an external Bluetooth device or to connect to an external Bluetooth device, the PIN needs to be entered.

For details on how to set the PIN of the external Bluetooth device, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.

The TV PIN is composed of numbers of up to 10 digits.

The TV PIN must have more than 1 digit.

LG 19LU5000 - SET TV PIN - 1

text_image BLUETOOTH Move OK Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info.

LG 19LU5000 - SET TV PIN - 2

LG 19LU5000 - SET TV PIN - 3

text_image BLUETOOTH Move OK Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 Bluetooth Headset : Disconn Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info. Set TV PIN 0 0 0 0_ Delete OK

LG 19LU5000 - SET TV PIN - 4

Select BLUETOOTH.

LG 19LU5000 - SET TV PIN - 5

Select TV PIN.

LG 19LU5000 - SET TV PIN - 6

Select the desired PIN number.

LG 19LU5000 - SET TV PIN - 7

- Press the < button to delete digits one by one.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

BLUETOOTH HEADSET

When you select the Bluetooth headset, you can listen to the TV sound in the Bluetooth headset through wireless communication.

You must pair it with any new Bluetooth device before the first use. For details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device. A maximum of 12 devices can be paired.

When the unit is searching for the Bluetooth headset, other buttons except for the "Stop" (OK button) do not work.

Connecting a new Bluetooth headset

You can only search for the new Bluetooth headset only in the Disconnected condition.

When you run the search, it will show you the list of all Bluetooth headsets responding.

After new Bluetooth device is searched, the PIN number is validated to connect the device. For details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.

When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models, you cannot hear stereo sound through the Bluetooth headset.

*When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland or Sweden is chosen in LCD TV Models

  1. A Bluetooth headset is disconnected if there is any.
  2. All headset device lists are deleted.
  3. Bluetooth mode is turned off.
  4. When trying to connect with a stereo-only headset, "Invalid format" will be displayed.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting a new Bluetooth headset - 1
Select BLUETOOTH.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting a new Bluetooth headset - 2
Select Bluetooth Headset.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting a new Bluetooth headset - 3

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting a new Bluetooth headset - 4
Select Bluetooth headset PIN number. Refer to the user manual of the applicable device for the PIN number.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting a new Bluetooth headset - 5
Connect the Bluetooth headset.

Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered

Bluetooth headsets are listed in the order most recently used with the headset currently in use listed at the top.

When connecting to the Bluetooth device already registered, you can select and connect directly without any PIN validation.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered - 1
Select BLUETOOTH.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered - 2
Select Bluetooth Headset.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered - 3

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered - 4
Message asking to connect the selected Bluetooth headset will be displayed. Select Yes or No.

LG 19LU5000 - Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered - 5
Connect the Bluetooth headset.

Select the desired Bluetooth headset.

  • After connecting/using the Bluetooth headset, the headset setting will be the Disconnected condition automatically when you turn off the power of the TV and then turn on.
  • After connecting the Bluetooth headset, the TV speaker is switched to Mute condition and the sound will only be generated from the headset.

Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use

LG 19LU5000 - Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use - 1

LG 19LU5000 - Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use - 2
Select BLUETOOTH.

LG 19LU5000 - Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use - 3
Disconnect the Bluetooth headset.

LG 19LU5000 - Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use - 4

LG 19LU5000 - Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use - 5

LG 19LU5000 - Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use - 6
Select Bluetooth Headset.

When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset

When the Bluetooth menu is "On" and there is a connection request from the headset, this message is dispalyed.

Not all headsets support the this feature.(Refer to the user manual of the applicable Bluetooth headset.)

LG 19LU5000 - When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset - 1

text_image Do you want to connect your headset? Yes No

LG 19LU5000 - When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset - 2

LG 19LU5000 - When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset - 3
Select Yes or No.

NOTE

▶ LG recommends the following headset models.
-Mono/Stereo : Nokia : BH501 / Jabra : BT620s /
Sony : DR-BT30Q / Philips : SHB7100 /
Plantronics : Pulsar590 / Motorola : HT820 /
Motorola : S9 / LG : HBS200
-Only Stereo : Logitech : Freepulse-wireless
-Only Mono : Motorola : H800 / Jabra : BT250v /
Jabra : BT2040 / Plantronics : Discovery665 /
Nokia : BH-900 / Sony Ericsson : HBH-GV435 /
Samsung : WEP500 / LG: Prada HBM-510
There might be an audio delay, depending on the buffer memory size of the headset.

The stereo/mono headset officially certified to be Bluetooth compatible can be searched and connected.

The stereo/mono headset that supports the A2DP or HSP function among the Bluetooth devices can be connected.

▶ If the surrounding environment of the TV is as follows, the device may not be searched or connected properly.

-If there is strong electromagnetic wave.

-If there are many Bluetooth devices.

-If the headset is turned off, not in place or has an error.

-Because products such as microwave oven, wireless LAN,

plasma light, gas range etc., use the same frequency range, it can cause communication error.

▶ Only one Bluetooth headset can be connected at once.
▶ Connection that is lost due to the TV being turned off etc. will not be automatically recovered. Try connecting the applicable device again.
▶ Some operations can be slower while operating the headset.
Even if you choose simplink Home Theater after using the headset during Simplink operation, the unit will not automatically switch to Home Theater speakers.
▶ When the headset connection continuously fails, pair the device one more time.
The audio quality of mono headsets will not be as good as that for stereo headsets.
▶ Mono headsets may suffer from noise as the distance from the TV increases, because they use a different transmission method compared with stereo headsets.
When a Bluetooth headset is in use, the Volume +/- and Mute keys do not work, and the Audio menu returns to the default value and is disabled.

MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE

If there are no devices registered, Registered Bluetooth Device menu will be deactivated and cannot be used. When 12 devices are registered, you cannot register any more devices, and the external device will no longer be able to pair up with the TV. In this case, you should delete one (disconnect first if a device is connected to the TV) and then you can register another device.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 1

text_image BLUETOOTH Move OK Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 2

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 3

text_image BLUETOOTH Bluetooth TV PIN Registered My Bluetooth : Off Registered Bluetooth Device 00:0d:44:84:14:62 FreePulse_Wireless LG L600V Connect Delete

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 4

Select BLUETOOTH.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 5

Select Registered Bluetooth Device.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 6

Check the registered Bluetooth device.

■ Connecting the registered Bluetooth headset

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 7

Select the registered Bluetooth headset you want to connect.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 8

Message asking to connect the selected Bluetooth headset will be displayed.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 9

Select Yes or No.

■ Deleting registered Bluetooth device

"Delete" will be available when selecting the device that is not connected to the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 10

Select the Bluetooth device you want to remove.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 11

Message asking to delete the selected Bluetooth device will be displayed.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 12

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 13

Select Yes or No.

■ Disconnecting registered Bluetooth device

"Disconnect" will be available when selecting the device that is connected to the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 14

Select the Bluetooth device that is currently connected to the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 15

Disconnect the Bluetooth device.

TO USE THE BLUETOOTH

MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION

This function provides the My Bluetooth Information to the user. "Edit" will be available when TV is not connected with any device.

You can edit the My Device Name. You can check the My Device Address.

LG 19LU5000 - MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION - 1

text_image BLUETOOTH Move OK Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info. BLUETOOTH Move OK Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth My Bluetooth In My Device Name 5 0 P S 7 0 0 0 - Z A My Device Address 0 0 : 0 5 : c 9 : f f : 0 0 f : 0 7 Edit OK

LG 19LU5000 - MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION - 2

Select BLUETOOTH.

LG 19LU5000 - MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION - 3

Select My Bluetooth Info..

LG 19LU5000 - MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION - 4

LG 19LU5000 - MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION - 5

You can use an the alphabet A to Z, the number 0 to 9, +/-, and blank.

LG 19LU5000 - MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION - 6

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE

For details on how to send photos(only JPEG) from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.

LG 19LU5000 - RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 1

text_image Receiving file(s) 1/3 Close
  • When you select Close with the ^ ∨ < > button, the OSD will disappear. And when you press the OK button again, it will appear again.

LG 19LU5000 - RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 2

Select the desired photos.

(Rotate) : Rotate photos.

■ Rotates the photo 90° clockwise upon OK button on ☺(Rotate).

  • The maximum accumulated size of the image(s) that can be received is 10MBytes.
  • You cannot receive the image(s) while using the Bluetooth headset.
  • You cannot receive the image(s) while listening to music from Bluetooth device.
  • When the external Bluetooth device is currently sending the photo, press the RETURN button to stop receiving the photo. All photos already received will be deleted as a result.
  • With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to transmit an image (JPEG) file to the TV set.

LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE

For details on how to listen to the musics from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.

You should use the Bluetooth device supporting A2DP(as external device)

- With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to listen to music via the TV speaker system.

LG 19LU5000 - LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 1

text_image Listening to Bluetooth music Back to TV
  • Press the + or - button to adjust the volume.
  • If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.
  • Press the RETURN button to return to normal TV viewing.

LG 19LU5000 - LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE - 2

NOTE

▶ You cannot listen to music while using the Bluetooth headset.
▶ You cannot listen to music while receiving image(s).

TO USE A USB DEVICE

It is not possible to use USB function in 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30** models.

When connecting a USB device

When you connect a USB device, this pop up menu is displayed, automatically.

"POP UP MENU" will not be displayed while the OSD including Menu, EPG or Schedule list is activated or while the Bluetooth Headset is connected.

When the Pop Up menu does not appear, you can select Music List, Photo List or Movie List(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) in the USB menu.

In USB device, you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder.

1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN jack on the TV.

LG 19LU5000 - When connecting a USB device - 1

text_image USB IN 4 301 IN 4 Memory Stick USB memory stick

- Only photo(JPEG), music (MP3) and movie(DAT, MPG, MPEG, VOB, AVI, DIVX, MP4, MKV, TS, TRP, TP)(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) are supported.

LG 19LU5000 - When connecting a USB device - 2

Select PHOTO LIST, MUSIC LIST or MOVIE LIST(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**).

LG 19LU5000 - When connecting a USB device - 3

LG 19LU5000 - When connecting a USB device - 4

text_image PHOTO LIST MUSIC LIST MOVIE LIST

When removing the USB device

Select the USB Device menu before removing the USB device.

LG 19LU5000 - When removing the USB device - 1

Select Eject.

LG 19LU5000 - When removing the USB device - 2

Precautions when using the USB device

▶ Only a USB storage device is recognizable.

▶ If the USB storage device is connected through a USB hub, the device is not recognizable.

▶ A USB storage device using an automatic recognition programme may not be recognized.

▶ A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.

The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.

▶ Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device is working. When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB storage device may be damaged.

▶ Please do not connect the USB storage device which was artificially maneuvered on the PC. The device may cause the product to malfunction or fail to be played. Never forget to use only a USB storage device which has normal music files, image files or movie files.

▶ Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT32 file system, NTFS file system provided with the Windows operating system. In case of a storage device formatted as a different utility programme which is not supported by Windows, it may not be recognized.

▶ Please connect power to a USB storage device(over 0.5A) which requires an external power supply. If not, the device may not be recognized.

▶ Please connect a USB storage device with the cable offered by the device maker. If you use a cable which is not offered by the device maker or an excessively long cable (max 5m), the device may not be recognized.

▶ Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operated smoothly.

▶ File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and filename can recognize up to 100 English characters.

▶ Be sure to back up important files since data stored in a USB memory device may be damaged. We will not be responsible for any data loss.

▶ If the USB HDD does not have an external power source, the USB device may not be detected. So be sure to connect the external power source.

▶ Data in a USB storage device cannot be deleted in the NTFS file system.

If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can use up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices.

▶ Only the FAT32 file system supports the delete function.

▶ If a USB memory device is connected to a USB multi-card reader, its volume data may not be detected.

▶ If the USB memory device does not work properly, disconnect and reconnect it.

▶ How fast a USB memory device is detected differs from device to device.

▶ If the USB is connected in Standby Mode, specific hard disk will automatically be loaded when the TV is turned on.

The recommended capacity is 1TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32GB or less for USB memory.

▶ Any device with more than the recommended capacity may not work properly.

If a USB external hard disk with a "Energy Saving" function does not work, turn the hard disk off and on again to make it work properly.

▶ USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the movie list.

LG 19LU5000 - Precautions when using the USB device - 1

NOTE

■ Image shown may differ from your TV.
In order to avoid losing the USB memory stick, use the USB connector(sold separately) to fix the USB memory stick to the USB connector holder of the TV. (Plasma TV only)

LG 19LU5000 - NOTE - 1

text_image USB connector holder USB Input Port USB Connector (sold separately) - Fix the one end of the USB connector to the USB memory stick and the other end to the USB connector holder.

PHOTO LIST

You can view photo files on USB storage device.

The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.

PHOTO(*.JPEG) supporting file

Baseline : 64 x 64 \~ 15360 x 8640

Progressive : 64 x 64 \~ 1920 x 1440

  • You can play JPEG files only.
  • Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.

Screen Components

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 1

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 2
Select USB.

2
LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 3

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 4

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 5
Select Photo List.

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 6

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 7

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 8

text_image Photo List Page 2/3 ☑ No Marked Drive1 JMJ001 1366x768, 125KB Up Folder Up Folder KY103 09/10/2008 KY101 09/10/2008 KY102 09/10/2008 JKMJ001 09/10/2008 JKMJ002 09/10/2008 JKMJ003 09/10/2008 JKMJ004 09/10/2008 JKY104 09/10/2008 JKY105 09/10/2008 JKMJ005 09/10/2008 JKMJ006 09/10/2008 JKMJ007 09/10/2008 JKMJ008 09/10/2008 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change MARK Mark Exit

① Moves to upper level folder
② Current page/Total pages
③ Total number of marked photos
4 Corresponding buttons on the remote control

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 9

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 10

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 11

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 12

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 13

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 14

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 15

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 16

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 17

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 18

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 19

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 20

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 21

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 22

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 23

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 24

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 25

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 26

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 27

TO USE A USB DEVICE

Photo Selection and PopUp Menu

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 1

text_image Photo List Page 2/3 □ No Marked Drive1 JMJ001 1366×768, 125KB Up Folder KR101 09/10/2008 KR102 09/10/2008 JMJ001 09/10/2008 JMJ002 09/10/2008 JMJ003 09/10/2008 JMJ004 09/10/2008 KR103 09/10/2008 KR104 09/10/2008 KR105 09/10/2008 JMJ005 09/10/2008 JMJ006 09/10/2008 JMJ007 09/10/2008 JMJ008 09/10/2008 Navigation Popul Menu Page Change Mark Mark Exit

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 2

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 3

text_image Photo List Page 2/3 No Marked Drive1 JMJ001 1366x768, 125KB Up Folder KR101 KR102 JMJ001 JMJ002 JMJ003 JMJ004 View Mark All Delete Close 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change MARK Mark Exit

▶ View : Display the selected item.
▶ Mark All : Mark all photos on the screen.
▶ Unmark All : Deselect all marked photos.
▶ Delete or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only) : Delete the selected photo item.
▶ Close : Close the pop-up menu.

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 4

Select the target folder or drive.

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 5

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 6

Select the desired photos.

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 7

Show the PopUp menu.

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 8

LG 19LU5000 - Photo Selection and PopUp Menu - 9

Select the desired PopUp menu.

  • Use the P ∧ ∨ button to navigation in the photo page.
  • Use the MARK button to mark or unmark a photo. When one or more photos are marked, you can view each marked photo or a slide show of the marked photos. If no photos are marked, you can view every individual photo in the folder or a slide show of all photos in the folder.

How to view photo

Detailed operations are available on full-sized photo view screen.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 1

text_image Photo List Page 2/3 ▼ No Marked Drive1 JMJ001 1366×768, 125KB Up Folder KR101 09/10/2008 KR102 09/10/2008 JMJ001 09/10/2008 JMJ002 09/10/2008 JMJ003 09/10/2008 JMJ004 09/10/2008 KR103 09/10/2008 KR104 09/10/2008 KR105 09/10/2008 JMJ005 09/10/2008 JMJ006 09/10/2008 JMJ007 09/10/2008 JMJ008 09/10/2008 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change MARK Mark Exit

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 2

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 3

text_image Photo List Page 2/3 ▼ No Marked Drive1 JMJ001 1366x768, 125KB Up Folder KR101 KR102 JMJ001 JMJ002 JMJ003 JMJ004 View Mark All Delete Close 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 09/10/2008 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change MARK Mark Exit

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 4

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 5

natural_image Black-and-white photo of a butterfly perched on a flower, with no visible text or symbols in the main image area.

The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.

Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 6

Select the target folder or drive.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 7

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 8

Select the desired photos.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 9

Show the PopUp menu.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 10

Select View.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 11

The selected photo is displayed in full size.

- Use the P ^ ∨ button to navigation in the photo page.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 12

natural_image Black-and-white photo of a butterfly resting on a flower, with no visible text or symbols in the main image area.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 13

Select the Slideshow, BGM, ⬤ (Rotate), Delete, Option or Hide.

  • Use < > button to select the previous or next photo.
  • Use < > button to select and control the menu on the full-sized screen.

▶ Slideshow : When no picture is selected, all photos in the current folder are displayed during slide show. If some photos are selected, those photos are displayed in a slide show.

■ Set the time interval of the slide show in Option.

▶ BGM (Background Music) : Listen to music while viewing photos in full size.

■ Set the Music Folder for BGM in Options before using this function.

▶ (Rotate) : Rotate photos.

■ Rotates the photo 90^ , 180^ , 270^ , 360^ clockwise.
It can not be rotate when the width of a picture is bigger than supported height.

▶ Delete(FAT32 file system only) : Delete photos.

▶ Option : Set values for Slide Speed and Music Folder for BGM.

■ Use ^ ∨ < > button and OK button to set values. Then go to OK and press OK to save the settings.

■ You cannot change Music Folder while BGM is playing.

▶ Hide : Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.

■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press OK button to display.

LG 19LU5000 - How to view photo - 14

text_image Press ▶ to set the time interval between slides. Slide Speed Fast Music Folder Music OK Cancel

MUSIC LIST

You can play music files on USB storage device.

Purchased music files(*.MP3) may contain copyright restrictions. Playback of these files may not be supported by this model.

Music file on your USB device can be played by this unit.

The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.

MUSIC (*.MP3) supporting file

Bit rate 32 \~ 320

  • Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3 : 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
  • Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3 : 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz
  • Sampling rate MPEG2.5 Layer3 : 8kHz, 11.025kHz, 12kHz

Screen Components

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 1
Select USB.

1 Preview: If any album jacket for the file(Album Art Image) exists, this jacket is displayed.
② Moves to upper level folder
③ Current page/Total pages
④ Total number of marked music title
⑤ Corresponding buttons on the remote control

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 2

text_image 2 OK Select Music List 3 4 Music List Page 2/3 No Marked Music Velvet Goldmine (OST... 00:00/01:34 Up Folder Title Duration Up Folder Favorite Music Favorite Music No.2 Velvet Goldmine (OST vers2) 01:34 Good Bye (Original Ver.) 03:23 Urban Nite (Feat.Amin.J) 04:28 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change MARK Mark Exit

Music Selection and PopUp Menu

As shown, up to 6 music titles are listed per page.

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 1

text_image Music List Page 2/3 No Marked Music Velvet Goldmine (OST... 00:00/01:34 Up Folder Title Duration Up Folder Favorite Music Favorite Music No.2 Velvet Goldmine (OST vers2) 01:34 Good Bye (Original Ver.) 03:23 Urban Nite (Feat.Amin.J) 04:28 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change MARK Mark Exit

V

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 2

text_image Music List Page 2/3 ▼ No Marked Music Velvet Goldmine (OST... 00:00/01:34 Up Folder Title Up Folder Favorite Music Favorite Music No.2 Velvet Goldmine (OST vers2) Good Bye (Original Ver.) Urban Nite (Feat.Amin.J) 4395KB 1Kbps Play Play with Photo Mark All Delete Close 04:28 Navigation Popula Menu Page Change MARK Mark Exit

▶ Play (During stop) : Play the selected music titles. One playback of a piece of music finishes, the next selected one will be played. When there are no selected music titles to play, the next one in the current folder will be played. If you go to a different folder and press the OK button, the current music in playback will stop.
▶ Play Marked : Play the selected music titles. Once a music finishes playing, the next selected one will be played automatically.
▶ Stop Play (During playback) : Stop the playing music titles.
▶ Play with Photo: Start playing the selected music titles and then move to the Photo List.
▶ Mark All : Mark all music titles in the folder.
▶ Unmark All : Deselect all marked music titles.
▶ Delete or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only) : Delete the selected music titles.
▶ Close : Close the pop-up menu.

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 3

Select the target folder or drive.

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 4

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 5

Select the desired music title

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 6

Show the PopUp menu.

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 7

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 8

Select the desired PopUp menu.

  • Use the P ∧ ∨ button to navigate up/down in the music page.
  • Use MARK button to mark or unmark a music. When one or more music files are marked, the marked music title will be played in sequence. For example, if you want to listen to only one music repeatedly, just mark the music only and play it. If no music is marked, all the music in the folder will be played in sequence.

If you don't press any button for a while during the playing, the play information box (as shown in the below) will float as a screen saver.
The 'Screen Saver'?

Screen saver is to prevent screen pixel damage due to an fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of time.

LG 19LU5000 - Music Selection and PopUp Menu - 9

NOTE

▶ When a music file is played, ♪ is displayed behind the title.
▶ A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime.
▶ A music downloaded from a paid service with copyright protection does not start but displays inappropriate information in playtime.
▶ If you press OK, ■ buttons, screen saver is stopped.
The PLAY(▶), Pause(II), ■, ▶▶, ◀◀ buttons on the remote control are also available in this mode.
▶ You can use the ▶ button to select the next music and the ◀ button to select the previous music.

MOVIE LIST(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

You can play movie files on a USB storage device.

The movie list is activated once USB is detected. It is used when playing movie files on TV.

Displays the movies in the USB folder and supports Play.

Allows playback of all movies in the folder and user desired files.

It is a movie list that displays folder information and movie file.

The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.

Movie(*.dat/*.mpg/*.mpeg/*.ts/*.trp/*.tp/*.vob/*.mp4/*.mkv/*.avi/*.divx) supporting file

Video format :DivX3.11, DivX4.12, DivX5.x, DivX6, Xvid1.00, Xvid1.01, Xvid1.02, Xvid1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta-1/beta-2, Mpeg-1, Mpeg-2, Mpeg-4, H.264, AVC

Audio format : AC3(Dolby Digital), EAC3, AAC, Mpeg, MP3, PCM, HEAAC, CDDA

Bit rate : within 32 \~ 320kbps(MP3)

Subtitle format : *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD, SubViewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.txt(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivx)

- Some user-created subtitles may not work properly.

- The screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the audio language is changed.

- A damaged movie file may not be played correctly, or some player functions may not be usable.

- Movie files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly.

- If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, either video or audio is outputted.

- HD videos with a maximum of 1920x1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P are supported, depending on the frame.

- Videos with resolutions higher than 1920X1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P may not work properly depending on the frame.

- Movie files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly.

- Max bitrate of playable movie file is 20Mbps.

- We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264.

• DTS Audio codec is not supported.

- A movie file more than 30GB in file size is not supported for playback.

- A DivX movie file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder.

- A video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed.

- Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn't support high speed may not work properly.

File Extension nameVideo DecoderAudio CodecResolution
mpg, mpeg, vobMPEG1, MPEG2AC3,MPEG,MP3,PCM1920x1080@30p
datMPEG1AC3,MPEG,MP3,PCM
ts,trp,tpMPEG2, H.264AC3,AAC,MPEG
mp4MPEG4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Dvix 4.12, Dvix 5.xDvix 6, Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03Xvid 1.10-beta, Xvid 1.10-beta 2, H.264AC3,EAC3,HEAAC,AAC,MPEG,MP3,PCM
aviMPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Divx 4, Divx 5, Divx 6Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta 1Xvid 1.10-beta 2, H.264AC3,EAC3,HEAAC,AAC,MPEG,MP3,PCM
mkvH.264, MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, AVCAC3,EAC3,HEAAC,AAC,MPEG,MP3,PCM
divxMPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Divx 4, Divx 5, Divx 6Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta 1Xvid 1.10-beta 2, H.264AC3,EAG3,HEAAC,AAC,MPEG,MP3,PCM

Screen Components

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 1
Select USB.

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 2

text_image 2 OK Select Movie List

① Moves to upper level folder
② Current page/Total pages
③ Total number of marked movie title
4 Corresponding buttons on the remote control

LG 19LU5000 - Screen Components - 3

text_image Movie List Page 2/3 No Marked movie Apple.(1992).Dvdrip 640x480, 720KB Up Folder Title Duration Up Folder Favorite Music The Aviator_(2004)_5CH_AC3_2CD Apple.(1992).Dvdrip 01:34:45 The Incredibles [REPACK_AC3_5.1c-CiM] 01:15:30 The Incredibles [REPACK_AC3_5.1c-CiM] 01:30:20 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change MARK Mark Exit

Movie Selection and PopUp Menu

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 1

text_image Movie List Page 2/3 No Marked movie Apple (1992).Dvrip 1:340, 120KB Up Folder Title Duration Up Folder Favorite Music The Aviator_(2004)_5CH_AC3_2CD Apple_(1992).Dvrip 01:34:45 The Incredibles [REPACK_AC3_5.1c-CIM] 01:15:30 The Incredibles [REPACK_AC3_5.1c-CIM] 01:30:20 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change Mark Exit

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 2

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 3

text_image Movie List Page 2/3 No Marked movie Apple (1992).Dvdrrip 1:340, 120KB Up Folder Title Duration Up Folder Favorite Music The Aviator_(2004)_5CH_AC3_2CD Apple_(1992).Dvdrrip The Incredibles (REPACK_AC3_5.1c- The Incredibles (REPACK_AC3_5.1c-CIM) Play Mark All Delete Close 01:30:20 Navigation Popup Menu Page Change Mark Exit

▶ Play : Play the selected movie.

Divx Play is executed while screen changes.

▶ Mark All : Mark all Movie in the folder.

▶ Unmark All : Deselect all marked movies.

▶ Delete or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only)

: Delete the selected Movie item.

▶ Close : Close the pop-up menu.

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 4

Select the target folder or drive.

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 5

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 6

Select the desired movie title

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 7

Show the PopUp menu.

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 8

LG 19LU5000 - Movie Selection and PopUp Menu - 9

Select the desired PopUp menu.

- Use the P ^ ∨ button to navigation in the movie page.

- Use MARK button to mark or unmark a movie. When one or more movie files are marked, the marked movies will be played in sequence.

- Press the RETURN button to return to normal TV viewing.

NOTE

In the case of files not supported, a message regarding non-supported file is displayed.

Using the Movie List function, play

LG 19LU5000 - Using the Movie List function, play - 1

natural_image Black-and-white photo of assorted fruits including melons, apples, and oranges on a plate (no text or symbols visible)
Subtitle LanguageSupport Language
Latin1English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Dutch, Portuguese, Danish, Romanian, Norwegian, Albanian, Gaelic, Welsh, Irish, Catalan, Valencian
Latin2Bosnian, Polish, Croatian, Czech, Slovak, Slovenian, Serbian, Hungarian
Latin4Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian
CyrillicBulgarian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian, Kazakh
GreekGreek
TurkishTurkish
Picture SizeFull
Audio Language1
Subtitle LanguageLatin 1
• Sync0
• Position0
Close

▶ Picture Size : Selects your desired picture format during movie play.
▶ Audio Language & Subtitle Language : Changes the Language Group of the audio/subtitle during movie play.
▶ Sync : Adjusts the time synchronisation of the subtitle from -10 secs \~ +10 secs by steps of 0.5 secs during movie play.
▶ Position : Changes the position of the subtitle either up or down during movie play.

Using the remote control

◀◀ / ▶▶When playing,repeatedly, press the REW(◀◀) button to speed up ◀◀(x2) -> ◀◀◀(x4) -> ◀◀◀◀(x8) -> ◀◀◀◀◀(x16) -> ◀◀◀◀◀◀(x32).repeatedly, press the FF(▶▶) button to speed up ▶▶(x2)-→ ▶▶▶(x4) -> ▶▶▶▶(x8) -> ▶▶▶▶▶(x16) -> ▶▶▶▶▶▶(x32).■ Pressing these buttons repeatedly increases the fast forward/reverse speed.
IIDuring playback, press the Pause(II) button.■ Still screen is displayed.■If no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing, the TV returns to the playback state.■Press the Pause(II) button and then use the FF(▶▶) button for slow motion.
< >■ When using the < or > button during playback a cursor indicating the position can be viewed on the screen.
PLAY(▶)Press the PLAY(▶) button to return to normal playback.
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to increase the brightness of your screen.(Refer to p. 102)
AV MODEPress the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.(Refer to p. 72)

DIVX REGISTRATION CODE

(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

Confirm the DivX registration code number of the TV. Using the registration number, movies can be rented or purchased at www.divx.com/vod.

With a DivX registration code from other TV, playback of rented or purchased DivX file is not allowed. (Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.)

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 1

text_image USB Photo List Music List Movie List DivX Reg. Code Deactivation

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 2

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 3

text_image USB Photo List Music List Movie List DivX Reg. C Deactivation i DivX(R) Video On Demand Your registration Code is: xxxxxxxxxxxx To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod. Close

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 4

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 5

Select USB.

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 6

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 7

Select DivX Reg. Code.

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 8

Display DivX Reg. Code.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

LG 19LU5000 - DIVX REGISTRATION CODE - 9

• Official DivX® Certified Product
- Plays all version of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX® media files
- “DivX Certified products: “DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.”

NOTE

▶ Movie files are supported as follows

Resolution : under 1920x1080 WxH pixels

Frame rate : under 30 frames/sec(1920x1080), under 60 frames/sec(under 1280x720)

▶ Video Codec : MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4, H.264, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x, DivX 6,

Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1, Xvid 1.01-beta2, AVC

DEACTIVATION

(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the available devices through the web_server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD allowed the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account, but to replace or deactivate any of those devices, the consumer had to contact DivX Support and request deletion. Now with this added feature, consumers will be able to deactivate the device themselves and hence better manage their DivX VOD devices.

LG 19LU5000 - DEACTIVATION - 1

LG 19LU5000 - DEACTIVATION - 2

Select USB.

LG 19LU5000 - DEACTIVATION - 3

Select Deactivation.

LG 19LU5000 - DEACTIVATION - 4

Select Yes.

LG 19LU5000 - DEACTIVATION - 5

Display Deactivation.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.
  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)

This system has an Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) to help your navigation through all the possible viewing options.

The EPG supplies information such as programme listings, start and end times for all available services. In addition, detailed information about the programme is often available in the EPG (the availability and amount of these programme details will vary, depending on the particular broadcaster).

This function can be used only when the EPG information is broadcast by broadcasting companies

The EPG displays the programme details for next 8 days.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 1

Shows the present screen information.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 2

Displayed with a DTV Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 3

Displayed with a Radio Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 4

Displayed with a MHEG Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 5

Displayed with a AAC Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 6

Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 7

Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 8

Displayed with a Teletext Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 9

Displayed with a Subtitle Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 10

Displayed with a Scramble Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 11

Displayed with a Dolby Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) - 12

Displayed with a Dolby Digital PLUS Programme.

480i/p, 576i/p, 720p, 1080i/p : Resolution of broadcasting programme

Switch on/off EPG

LG 19LU5000 - Switch on/off EPG - 1

Switch on or off EPG.

Select a programme

LG 19LU5000 - Select a programme - 1
or

LG 19LU5000 - Select a programme - 2

Select desired programme.

LG 19LU5000 - Select a programme - 3

The EPG will disappear after moving to a selected program.

Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode

You can view a program being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow.

RED

Change EPG mode.

YELLOW

Enter Timer Record/Remind setting mode.

BLUE

Enter Timer Record/Remind list mode.

LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 1

The EPG will disappear after moving to a selected program.

LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 2

Select NOW or NEXT Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 3

Select the Broadcast Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 4

Page Up/Down.

LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 5

text_image Programme Guide 1 YLE TV1 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 ALL NOW NEXT 1 YLE TV1 That '70s show Keno 2 YLE TV2 Your World Today World Business 4 TV. Legenen om Den.... Fantomen 5 YLE FST Naturtimmen Kritiskt 6 CNN Lyssna ABC 8 YLE24 Glamour Tänään otsikoissa FAV Favourite INFO Information Pr. Change TV/RAD RADIO Mode Schedule Schedule List

LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 6

or
LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 7

Switch off EPG.

LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 8

Select TV or RADIO Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - BLUE - 9

Detail information on or off

Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 1

Change EPG mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 2

Enter Date setting mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 3

Enter Timer Record/Remind setting mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 4

Enter Timer Record/Remind list mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 5

The EPG will disappear after moving to a selected program.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 6

Select Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 7

Select the Broadcast Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 8

text_image Programme Guide 1 YLE TV1 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 ALL 6 Apr. (Fri.) 14:00 15:00 1 YLE TV1 Antigues Roadshow Kungskonsumente 2 YLE TV2 Mint Extra TV2: Farmen The Drum 4 TV. The Drum 5 YLE FST You Call The Hits 6 CNN Fashion Essentials 8 YLE24 ... ... ... ... Tänään otsikoissa FAV Favourite INFO Information Pr. Change TV/RAD RADIO Mode Date Schedule Schedule List

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 9

Page Up/Down.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 10

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 11

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 12

Select TV or RADIO Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode - 13

Detail information on or off

Button Function in Date Change Mode

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Date Change Mode - 1

Switch off Date setting mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Date Change Mode - 2

Change to the selected date.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Date Change Mode - 3

Select a date.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Date Change Mode - 4

Switch off Date setting mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Date Change Mode - 5

or

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Date Change Mode - 6

Switch off EPG.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Date Change Mode - 7

text_image Programme Guide 1 YLE TV1 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 ALL 6 Apr. (Fri.) 14:00 15:00 1 YLE TV1 Antigues Roadshow Kungskonsumente 2 YLE TV2 Mint Extra TV2: Farmen The Drum 4 TV. The Drum 5 YLE FST You Call The Hits 6 CNN Fashion Essentials 8 YLE24 ... ... ... Tänään otsikoissa Date. Change Date Exit

EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)

Button Function in Extended Description Box

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Extended Description Box - 1

Text Up/Down.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Extended Description Box - 2

Enter Timer Record/Remind setting mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Extended Description Box - 3

or (RETURN) The detail information on or off.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Extended Description Box - 4

Switch off EPG.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Extended Description Box - 5

text_image Information 1 BBC ONE 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 Fia World Touring Car Championship 6 Apr. 2007 14:00 15:30 Fia Champion Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/ Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted INFO Info. Exit Schedule

Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode

Sets a start or end time for recording, and sets only a start time for the reminder with the end time grayed out. This function is available only when recording equipment that use pin8 recording signalling has been connected to the DTV-OUT(AV2) terminal, using a SCART cable.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode - 1

Change to Guide or Schedule mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode - 2

Select Record or Remain. Function setting.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode - 3

Select Date, Start/End time or Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode - 4

Save Timer Record/Remind.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode - 5

text_image Select the date to record. Date Start Time End Time Programme 6 Mar. 15:09 17 : 30 That '70s sh OK Prev.

Button Function in Schedule List Mode

If you've created a schedule list, a scheduled program is displayed at the scheduled time even when you are watching a different program at the time.

Only the Up/Down/OK/Return keys will work when a popup window is open.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Schedule List Mode - 1

Add new Manual Recording setting mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Schedule List Mode - 2

Add new Timer Watching setting mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Schedule List Mode - 3

or (GUIDE) Change to Guide mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Schedule List Mode - 4

Switch off EPG.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Schedule List Mode - 5

Select your desired Option(Modify/Delete/Delete All).

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Schedule List Mode - 6

text_image Schedule List Page1/1 Fri. 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 2007 04 Start Date Start Time Title 6 May 16:00 Friend1 6 May 18:00 Friend2 Create Modify Delete Delete All Close Remind DTV 19 Dave (Fri.)06/05/2007 16:00 Move Modify/Delete P Page Change Exit New Record New Remind Programme Guide

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Schedule List Mode - 7

Select Schedule List.

LG 19LU5000 - Button Function in Schedule List Mode - 8

Page Up/Down.

PICTURE CONTROL

PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL

You can watch the screen in various picture formats; 16:9, Just Scan, Original, Full Wide, 4:3, 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom.

If a fixed image is displayed on the screen for a long time, that fixed image may become imprinted on the screen and remain visible.

You can adjust the enlarge proportion using ^ ∨ button.

This function works in the following signal.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL - 1

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL - 2

Select Aspect Ratio.

LG 19LU5000 - Select Aspect Ratio. - 1

Select the desired picture format.

• 16:9

The following selection will allow you to adjust the picture horizontally, in linear proportion, to fill the entire screen(useful for viewing 4:3 formatted DVDs).

LG 19LU5000 - • 16:9 - 1

natural_image Black and white photo of several round balls on a textured surface (no text or symbols visible)

- Just Scan

Following Selection will lead to you view the picture of best quality without loss of original picture in high resolution image.

Note : If there is noise in original Picture, You can see the noise at the edge.

LG 19LU5000 - - Just Scan - 1

text_image Just Scan
  • You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in the PICTURE menu.
  • For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After completing Zoom Setting, the display goes back to Q.Menu.

- Original

When your TV receives a wide screen signal it will automatically change to the picture format broadcast.

LG 19LU5000 - - Original - 1

text_image Original

• Full Wide

When TV receives the wide screen signal, it will lead you to adjust the picture horizontally or vertically, in a linear proportion, to fill the entire screen fully.

LG 19LU5000 - • Full Wide - 1

text_image Full Wide

• 4:3

The following selection will allow you to view a picture with an original 4:3 aspect ratio, gray bars will appear on both the left and right of the screen.

LG 19LU5000 - • 4:3 - 1

natural_image Close-up of a ball with a rounded head and white spots, resting on a textured surface (no text or symbols visible)

• 14:9

You can view a picture format of 14:9 or a general TV programme in the 14:9 mode. The 14:9 screen is viewed in the same way as in 4:3, but is magnified to the left and right.

LG 19LU5000 - • 14:9 - 1

natural_image Close-up of a ball with white balls on a textured surface (no text or symbols visible)

- Zoom

The following selection will allow you to view the picture without any alteration, while filling the entire screen. However, the top and bottom of the picture will be cropped.

LG 19LU5000 - - Zoom - 1

natural_image Close-up of a pool table with multiple balls on a gravel surface (no text or symbols visible)

- Cinema Zoom

Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to enlarge the picture in correct proportion. Note: When enlarging or reducing the picture, the image may become distorted.

LG 19LU5000 - - Cinema Zoom - 1

natural_image Close-up of round balls on a textured surface (no text or symbols visible)

◀ or ▶ button: Adjust enlarge proportion of Cinema Zoom. The adjustment range is 1\~16.
▼ or ▲ button: Move the screen.

NOTE

▶ You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in Component mode.
▶ You can only select 4:3, Original, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in HDMI mode.
▶ You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide) in RGB mode only.
▶ In DTV/HDMI/Component (over 720p) mode, Just Scan is available.

PICTURE WIZARD

This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image.

Use this to calibrate the screen quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. General users can calibrate the screen quality by easily following each stage.

When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the changed result as an example.

In RGB input, the changed Colour, Tint and H/V Sharpness values are not applied.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE WIZARD - 1

text_image PICTURE Aspect Ratio : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving : Off Picture Mode : Standard • Backlight 70 • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE WIZARD - 2

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE WIZARD - 3

text_image Picture Wizard With Picture Wizard, you can adjust the picture quality of the original image.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE WIZARD - 4

Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - Select PICTURE. - 1

Select Picture Wizard.

  • If you stop the setting before the final stage, the changes will not be applied
  • The adjustment value is saved to Expert1.
  • Once the Picture Wizard sets the image quality, the Energy Saving is changed into Off. (LCD TV only)

LG 19LU5000 - Select Picture Wizard. - 1

Adjust Black level, White level, Colour, Tint, H Sharpness, V Sharpness, Backlight (LCD TV only).

LG 19LU5000 - Select Picture Wizard. - 2

LG 19LU5000 - Select Picture Wizard. - 3

Select input source to apply the settings.

LG 19LU5000 - Select Picture Wizard. - 4

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.
  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

e ENERGY SAVING

It reduces the TV's power consumption.

The default factory setting complies with the Energy Star requirements and is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home.

You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the Energy Saving level or by setting the Picture Mode.

When adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG mode, the Energy Saving setting is applied after MHEG is finished.

LCD TV only
LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 1

text_image PICTURE Aspect Ratio : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving : Off Picture Mode : Standard Backlight Contrast Brightne Sharpness Auto Off Minimum Medium Maximum Screen Off

Plasma TV only
LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 2

text_image PICTURE Aspect Ratio : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving : Intelligent Se Picture Mode : Vivid • Contrast 1 • Brightness 5 • Sharpness 7 • Colour 70 Intelligent Sensor Off Minimum Medium Maximum Low

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 3

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 4
Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 5

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 6
Select e∅ Energy Saving.

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 7

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 8

Select Auto(except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**), Off, Minimum, Medium, Maximum or Screen Off.

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 9

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 10
Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 11

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 12
Select e∅ Energy Saving.

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 13

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 14
Select Intelligent Sensor, Off, Minimum, Medium or Maximum.

- Intelligent Sensor

LG 19LU5000 - e ENERGY SAVING - 15
Select Low, Middle or High.

  • When selecting Screen off, TV turned off after 3 seconds.
  • If you adjust “Energy Saving-Auto(except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**), Minimum, Medium, Maximum”, Backlight feature will not work.(LCD TV only).
  • You can also adjust this feature by selecting Energy Saving button on the remote control.
  • When selecting Auto, Backlight is automatically adjusted through intelligent sensor according to the surrounding condition when intelligent sensor is in the TV.

PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS

Picture Mode-Preset

VividStrengthen the contrast, brightness, colour and sharpness for vivid picture.
StandardThe most general screen display status.
NaturalThe most natural screen display status.
CinemaOptimizes video for watching movies.
SportOptimizes video for watching sports events.
GameOptimizes video for playing games.

LCD TV only
LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 1

text_image PICTURE Aspect Ratio : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving : Off Picture Mode : Stand Intelligent Sensor Vivid Standard Natural Cinema Sport Game Expert1 Expert2

LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 2

text_image 1 MENU Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 3

text_image 2 OK Select Picture Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 4

text_image 3 OK Select Intelligent Sensor(except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50** 32/37/42LF25** 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20** 32/37/42/47LH30**), Vivid, Standard, Natural, Cinema, Sport or Game.

Plasma TV only
LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 5

text_image PICTURE Aspect Ratio : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving : Intellige Picture Mode : Vivid Contrast Brightn Sharpne Colour Vivid Standard Cinema Sport Game Expert1 Expert2

(Only 50/60PS80**)

LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 6
(Only 50/60PS70**)

LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 7

text_image 1 MENU Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 8

text_image 2 OK Select Picture Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Picture Mode-Preset - 9

text_image 3 OK Select Vivid, Standard, IHX Cinema (or Cinema), Sport or Game.
  • Picture Mode adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance. Select the preset value in the Picture Mode menu based on the programme category.
  • When the Intelligent sensor function is on, the most suitable picture is automatically adjusted according to the surrounding conditions. (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)
  • You can also adjust Picture Mode in the Q. Menu.
  • Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**)

- THX Cinema(Only 50/60PS80**):This is cinema quality mode to provide you the experience of watching a movie at home. The user will be able to enjoy the best level of satisfactory screen quality in any movie without any separate adjustments. Cinema expresses the optimal screen quality when it is darkest.

When selecting THX Cinema, Aspect ratio changes to Just scan.

- IHX Cinema(Thomlinson Holman's Experiment)is the audio and video certification standard of THX established by George Lucas,who directed the movie Star Wars,and Thomlinson.

This is the product to be certified in THX display area and guarantees screen quality that exceeds the display standard specification in both hardware and software.

MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT

Picture Mode-User option

Backlight (LCD TV Only)

To control the brightness of the screen, adjust the brightness of LCD panel.

Adjusting the backlight when setting the brightness of the set is recommended.

Contrast

Adjusts the signal level between black and white in the picture. You may use Contrast when the bright part of the picture is saturated.

Brightness

Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture.

Sharpness

Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture.

The lower the level, the softer the image.

Colour

Adjusts intensity of all colours.

Tint

Adjusts the balance between red and green levels.

It is not available to use this function in “Intelligent Sensor” (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**).

LG 19LU5000 - Tint - 1

text_image PICTURE Aspect Ratio : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving : Off Picture Mode : Standard Backlight 70 Contrast 90 Brightness 50 Sharpness 70

LG 19LU5000 - Tint - 2

LG 19LU5000 - Tint - 3

text_image PICTURE Aspect Ratio : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving : Off Picture Mode : Standard Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Intelligent Sensor Vivid Standard Natural Cinema Sport Game Expert1 Expert2

LG 19LU5000 - Tint - 4
Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - Tint - 5
Select Picture Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - Tint - 6
Select Vivid, Standard, Natural, Cinema(or IHX Cinema), Sport or Game.

LG 19LU5000 - Tint - 7
Select Backlight(LCD TV only), Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Colour or Tint.

LG 19LU5000 - Tint - 8

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

NOTE

▶ You cannot adjust colour, sharpness and tint in the RGB-PC mode.
When the Expert 1/2 is selected, you can select Backlight(LCD TV only), Contrast, Brightness, H Sharpness, V Sharpness, Colour or Tint.

PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY

You can calibrate the screen for each Picture Mode or set the video value according to the special video screen.

You can set the video value differently for each input.

To reset to the factory default screen after making adjustments to each video mode, execute the “Picture Reset” function for each Picture Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY - 1

text_image PICTURE • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Tint 0 • Advanced Control • Picture Reset Screen

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY - 2

text_image PICTURE Screen Colour Temperature Dynamic Contrast Dynamic Colour Noise Reduction Gamma Black Level Eye Care Real Cinema TruMotion 100HZ Medium Medium Low Medium Medium Auto Off On Low Close

LCD TV only

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY - 3

text_image Colour Temperature Medium Dynamic Contrast Medium Dynamic Colour Low Noise Reduction Medium Gamma Medium Black Level Auto Film Mode On Close

Plasma TV only

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY - 4
Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY - 5
Select Advanced Control.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY - 6
Select your desired Source.:
Colour Temperature, Dynamic Contrast, Dynamic Colour, Noise Reduction, Gamma, Black Level, Eye Care(LCD TV only), Real Cinema(LCD TV only), Film Mode(Plasma TV only), TruMotion 100Hz(LCD TV only), Colour Gamut, Edge Enhancer, xvYCC or OPC(LCD TV only)).(Refer to p. 107\~108)

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY - 7
Make appropriate adjustments.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL

By segmenting categories, Expert1 and Expert2 provide more categories which users can set as they see fit, offering the optimal picture quality for users.

This may also be used to help a professional optimize the TV performance using specific videos.

Image shown may differ from your TV.

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 1

text_image PICTURE Aspect Ratio : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving : Off Picture Mode : Exp Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Intelligent Sensor Vivid Standard Natural Cinema Sport Game Expert1 Expert2

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 2

text_image PICTURE Screen Dynamic Contrast Noise Reduction Gamma Black Level Real Cinema TruMotion 100HZ Colour Standard Colour Gamut Edge Enhancer Off Off Medium Auto On Low SD Standard High Close

LCD TV only

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 3

text_image Dynamic Contrast Noise Reduction Gamma Black Level Film Mode Colour Standard Colour Gamut Edge Enhancer xvYCC Off Off Medium Auto On SD Standard High Auto Close

Plasma TV only

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 4

Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 5

Select Picture Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 6

Select isf Expert1 or isf Expert2.

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 7

Select Expert Control.

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 8

Select your desired Source.

LG 19LU5000 - EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL - 9

Make appropriate adjustments.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

*This feature is not available for all models.

Colour Temperature(Warm/Medium/Cool)Choose one of three automatic colour adjustments. Set to warm to enhance hotter colours such as red, or set to cool to make picture bluish.
Dynamic Contrast(Off/Low/Medium(LCD TV only)/High)Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark parts darker.
Dynamic Colour(Off/Low/High)Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feature enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, green and white look more vivid.
Noise Reduction(Off/Low/Medium/High)Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
Gamma(Low/Medium/High)You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture.Low: Make dark and middle gray level area of the picture brighter.Medium: Express original picture levels.High: Make dark and middle gray level area of the picture darker.
Black Level(Low/High)Low: The reflection of the screen gets darker.High: The reflection of the screen gets brighter.Auto: Realizing the black level of the screen and set it to High or Low automatically.Set black level of the screen to proper level.This function enables to select 'Low' or 'High' in the following mode: AV(NTSC-M), HDMI or Component. Otherwise, 'Black level' is set to 'Auto'.
Eye Care(On/Off)*This feature is not available for all models.Adjust the brightness of the screen to prevent the screen from being too bright. Dims extremely bright pictures.This feature is disable in "Picture Mode-Vivid, Cinema, Intelligent Sensor (except for 19/22LU40** 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42/47LH30**).
Real Cinema/Film Mode(On/Off)Makes video clips recorded in film look more natural by eliminating judder effect.This function can work when TruMotion is off.
TruMotion 100Hz(Off/Low/High)*This feature is not available for all models.High: Provides smoother picture movement.Low: Provides smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use.Off: Use this setting when "High" and "Low" setting result in noise.TruMotion can reduce perception of blur on fast moving scenes by displaying one hundred images per second.It is used for the best picture quality without any motion blur or judder when you enter a quick image or Film Source.This feature is disable in RGB-PC,HDMI-PC mode.If you enable "TruMotion", noise may appear on the screen.If this occurs, set "TruMotion" to "Off".
Colour Gamut(Wide/Standard)• Standard: Mode to reproduce original colour according to the standard of input signal independent of the display characteristics.• Wide: Mode to use and set the rich colour area of the display.■ Maximize the utilization for colour area that can be expressed.
Edge Enhancer(LCD TV:Off/Low/High Plasma TV:On/Off)■ Shows clearer and distinctive yet natural corners of the video.
xvYCC(Auto/off/on)■ This is the function to express richer colour.■ This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema, Expert" when xvYCC signal is inputted through HDMI
OPC(On/Off)*This feature is not available for all models.■ As the technology to reduce the power consumption while keeping the same brightness, this has the effect of reducing power consumption, improvement in contrast.
Colour Standard(SD/HD)■ Converts the colour of a different video to HD colour. This function is set for SD video (BT-601) and HD video (BT-709) colour format.
Expert Pattern(Off/Expert1/Expert2)■ This is the pattern necessary for expert adjustment.■ This function is enabled in "Picture Mode - Expert" when you watch DTV.
Colour Filter(Off/Red/Green/Blue)■ This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video.You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately.
White Balance(Medium/Warm/Cool)■ This is the function to adjust the overall colour of the screen to the feeling you want.a. • Method : 2 Points• Pattern: Inner, Outer• Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness:The adjustment range is -50 ~ +50.b. • Method : 10 point IRE(LCD TV), 20 Point IRE(Plasma TV)• Pattern: Inner / Outer• IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video signal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 - 100(LCD TV), 5, 10, 15 - 100(Plasma TV). You can adjust Red, Green or Blue according to each setting.Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2 gamma. You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, than the target luminance value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE.(LCD TV only)• Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 ~ +50.
Colour Management System■ As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test patterns, this does not affect other colours but can be used to selectively adjust the 6 colour areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow).Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjustments for the general video.■ Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta.• Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta Colour : The adjustment range is -30 ~ +30.• Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint : The adjustment range is -30 ~ +30.■ This feature is disable in RGB-PC and HDMI (PC) mode.

PICTURE RESET

Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 1

text_image PICTURE • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Tint 0 R G • Advanced Control • Picture Reset Screen

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 2

text_image PICTURE Move OK • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 ? All picture setting will be resetted. continue? Yes No Screen

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 3

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 4

Select PICTURE.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 5

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 6

Select Picture Reset.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 7

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 8

Select Yes or No.

LG 19LU5000 - PICTURE RESET - 9

Initialize the adjusted value.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

POWER INDICATOR (LCD TV ONLY)

It helps you adjust the brightness of moving LED and sound when power is turned on.

Startup Sound(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)

Set Startup Sound to Off, Low, Medium or High when the power is turned on.

Standby Light

Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to Off, Low or High in standby mode.(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**)

Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off in standby mode.(except for 32/37/42/47LH70**)

Power Light

Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off when the power turns on.

LG 19LU5000 - POWER INDICATOR (LCD TV ONLY) - 1

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID : 1 Power Indicator Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Demo Factory Reset

LG 19LU5000 - POWER INDICATOR (LCD TV ONLY) - 2

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID : 1 Power Indicator Demo Mode Mode Setting Factory Reset Startup Sound Standby Light Power Light Medium On On Close

LG 19LU5000 - POWER INDICATOR (LCD TV ONLY) - 3

Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - POWER INDICATOR (LCD TV ONLY) - 4

Select Power Indicator.

LG 19LU5000 - POWER INDICATOR (LCD TV ONLY) - 5

Select Startup Sound(Only

32/37/42/47LH70**), Standby Light or Power Light.

LG 19LU5000 - POWER INDICATOR (LCD TV ONLY) - 6

Select your desired Source.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

IMAGE STICKING MINIMIZATION (ISM) METHOD (PLASMA TV ONLY)

A frozen or still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods will result in a ghost image remaining even when you change the image. Avoid allowing a fixed image to remain on the screen for prolonged periods.

White Wash

White wash removes permanent images from the screen.

Note: An excessive permanent image may be impossible to clear entirely with White Wash.

Orbiter

Orbiter may help prevent ghost images. However, it is best not to allow any fixed image to remain on the screen. To avoid a permanent image on the screen, the screen will move every 2 minutes.

Colour Wash

The colour block with the screen moved a little and the white pattern are alternately displayed. It is difficult to sense the afterimage occurred while the temporary afterimage is removed and the colour pattern is operating.

LG 19LU5000 - Colour Wash - 1

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID : 1 ISM Method : Normal Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Demo Factory Reset OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID : 1 ISM Method : Normal Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Factory Reset Normal Orbiter Colour Wash White Wash

LG 19LU5000 - Colour Wash - 2
Select OPTION.

- If you do not need this function, set Normal.

LG 19LU5000 - Colour Wash - 3
Select ISM Method.

LG 19LU5000 - Colour Wash - 4
Select Normal, Orbiter, Colour Wash or White Wash.

LG 19LU5000 - Colour Wash - 5
Save.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

PICTURE CONTROL

DEMO MODE

Display the slide show to explain the various logo of this TV.

It is not possible to use Demo Mode in Home Use mode.

In Store Demo, Demo Mode is automatically set to On.

Once Demo Mode is set to Off in Store Demo, Demo Mode does not run and only the screen is reset.

The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in Demo Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - DEMO MODE - 1

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID : 1 Power Indicator Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Demo Factory Reset

LG 19LU5000 - DEMO MODE - 2

LG 19LU5000 - DEMO MODE - 3

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID : 1 Power Indicator Demo Mode Off Mode Setting On Factory Reset

LCD TV only

LG 19LU5000 - DEMO MODE - 4
Plasma TV only

LG 19LU5000 - DEMO MODE - 5
Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - DEMO MODE - 6
Select Demo Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - DEMO MODE - 7
Select On to show the various logo of TV.

LG 19LU5000 - DEMO MODE - 8

Return to TV viewing.

If you want to stop the demo, press any button. (except for

MUTE, △ + , - button)

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

MODE SETTING

We recommend setting the TV to "Home Use" mode for the best picture in your home environment. "Store Demo" mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores..

LG 19LU5000 - MODE SETTING - 1

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID : 1 Power Indicator Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Demo Factory Reset

LG 19LU5000 - MODE SETTING - 2

LG 19LU5000 - MODE SETTING - 3

text_image OPTION SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Simple Man Set ID Power Indic Demo Mode Mode Setting Factory Res Selecting the environment. Choose the setting mode you want. Store Demo Home Use Energy Star Select [Home Use] to use this TV at home. To use this TV at store, select [Store Demo].

LG 19LU5000 - MODE SETTING - 4

Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - MODE SETTING - 5

Select Mode Setting.

LG 19LU5000 - MODE SETTING - 6

Select Store Demo or Home Use.

LG 19LU5000 - MODE SETTING - 7

Save.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

AUTO VOLUME LEVELER

AVL automatically remains on the same level of volume if you change programmes.

Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed every time the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making automatic adjustments for each program.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO VOLUME LEVELER - 1

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off Level 3 Balance 0 L R Sound Mode : Standard SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO VOLUME LEVELER - 2

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off Level Balance Sound Mode : Standard SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO VOLUME LEVELER - 3

Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO VOLUME LEVELER - 4

Select Auto Volume.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO VOLUME LEVELER - 5

Select On or Off.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

CLEAR VOICE II

By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better.

LG 19LU5000 - CLEAR VOICE II - 1

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off Balance : Level 3 - Sound Mode : Standard SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50

LG 19LU5000 - CLEAR VOICE II - 2

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off Level Balance 0 L R Sound Mode : Standard SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50

LG 19LU5000 - CLEAR VOICE II - 3

Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - CLEAR VOICE II - 4

Select Clear Voice II.

LG 19LU5000 - CLEAR VOICE II - 5

Select On or Off.

Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On - 1

Select Level.

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On - 2

Make desired adjustment.

  • If you select "On" for Clear Voice II, SRS TruSurround XT feature will not work.
  • Select levels from '-6' to '+6'.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.

  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

You can select your preferred sound setting; Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or Game and you can also adjust the Treble, Bass.

Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any Special adjustment as the TV sets the appropriate sound options based on the programme content.

Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport and Game are preset for optimum sound quality at the factory.

Standard Offers standard-quality sound.

Music Optimizes sound for listening to music.

Cinema Optimizes sound for watching movies.

Sport Optimizes sound for watching sports events.

Game Optimizes sound for playing games.

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND &amp; LANGUAGE CONTROL - 1

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off Level 3 Balance 0 L R Sound Mode : Standard SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND &amp; LANGUAGE CONTROL - 2

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off • Level 3 Balance 0 Sound Mode : Standard • SRS TruSurround XT • Treble 50 • Bass 50 Standard Music Cinema Sport Game

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND &amp; LANGUAGE CONTROL - 3

Select AUDIO.

- You can also adjust Sound Mode in the Q. Menu.

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND &amp; LANGUAGE CONTROL - 4

Select Sound Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND &amp; LANGUAGE CONTROL - 5

Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or Game.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE - 1

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off • Level 3 - Balance 0 L R Sound Mode : Standard (User) • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 - • Bass 50 -

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE - 2

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE - 3

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off • Level 3 Balance 0 Sound Mode : Standard (User) • SRS TruSurround XT • Treble 50 • Bass 50 Standard (User) Music Cinema Sport Game

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE - 4

Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE - 5

Select Sound Mode.

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE - 6

Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or Game.

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE - 7

Select Treble or Bass.

LG 19LU5000 - SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE - 8

Set the desired sound level.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SRS TRUSURROUND XT

Select this option to sound realistic.

LG 19LU5000 - SRS TRUSURROUND XT - 1

Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - SRS TRUSURROUND XT - 2

Select SRS TruSurround XT.

LG 19LU5000 - SRS TRUSURROUND XT - 3

Select On or Off.

SRS TruSurround XT : TruSurround XT is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multicannel content over two speakers.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SRS TruSurround XT is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc.

TruSurround XT technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

BALANCE

You can adjust the sound balance of the speakers to preferred levels.

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 1

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off • Level 3 - Balance 0 L R Sound Mode : Standard • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Bass 50

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 2

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 3

text_image AUDIO Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II : Off • Level Balance Sound Mode : Standard • SRS TruSu • Treble 50 • Bass 50 Balance 0 < L11111111111111111111111111111111111111111 Close

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 4

Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 5

Select Balance.

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 6

Make desired adjustment.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

You can adjust the TV internal speaker status.

In AV1, AV2, AV3, COMPONENT, RGB and HDMI1 with HDMI to DVI cable, the TV speaker can be operational even when there is no video signal.

If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV's internal speakers.

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 7

text_image AUDIO SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50 Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM TV Speaker : Off Audio Description :On Volume 0

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 8

text_image AUDIO SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50 Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM Off TV Speaker : Off On Audio Description :On Volume 0

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 9

Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 10

Select TV Speaker.

LG 19LU5000 - BALANCE - 11

Select On or Off.

NOTE

When the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theater is operating, the sound output automatically switches to the Home theater speaker, but when the TV speaker is turned on, the sound output the TV speaker.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output.

The TV can only output DOLBY Digital if a channel is broadcast with Dolby Digital audio.

When Dolby digital is available, selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF(Sony Philips Digital Interface) output to Dolby Digital.

If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when dolby digital is not available, SPDIF output will be PCM(Pulse-code modulation).

Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby Digital Audio, only Dolby Digital will be played.

LG 19LU5000 - SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT - 1

text_image AUDIO SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50 Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM TV Speaker : On Audio Description : On Volume 0

LG 19LU5000 - SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT - 2

text_image AUDIO SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50 Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM Auto PCM TV Speaker : On Audio Description :On Volume 0

LG 19LU5000 - SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT - 3
Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT - 4
Select Digital Audio Out.

LG 19LU5000 - SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT - 5
Select Auto or PCM.

DOLBY®

DIGITAL PLUS

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

- There is a possibility that when HDMI mode, some DVD players do not make SPDIF sound. At that time, set the output of the digital audio of the DVD player to PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby Digital Plus is not supported).

ItemAudio InputDigital Audio output
Auto(Speaker On)MPEGPCM
DDDD
DD+DD
HE-AACPCM
Auto(Speaker Off)MPEGPCM
DDDD
DD+DD
HE-AACDD
PCMPCMPCM
  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

AUDIO RESET

Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO RESET - 1

text_image AUDIO SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50 Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM TV Speaker : On Audio Description :On Volume 0

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO RESET - 2

text_image AUDIO SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Digital Resetting sound mode configuration... TV Speaker : On Audio Description :On Volume 0

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO RESET - 3

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO RESET - 4

Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO RESET - 5

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO RESET - 6

Select Reset.

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO RESET - 7

Initialize the adjusted value.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL

AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)

This function is for the blind, and provides explanatory audio describing the current situation in a TV programme in addition to the basic audio.

When Audio Description On is selected, basic audio and Audio Description are provided only for those programmes that have Audio Description included.

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 1

text_image AUDIO SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50 Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM TV Speaker : On Audio Description : On Volume 0

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 2

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 3

text_image AUDIO SRS TruSurround XT : Off Treble 50 Bass 50 Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM TV Speaker : On Audio Description : On Volume Off On

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 4

Select AUDIO.

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 5

Select Audio Description.

LG 19LU5000 - AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 6

Select On or Off.

Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On - 1

Select Volume.

LG 19LU5000 - Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On - 2

Make desired adjustment.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only)

When a programme is selected, the sound information for the station appears with the programme number and station name.

LG 19LU5000 - Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) - 1

Select Audio.

LG 19LU5000 - Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) - 2

Select the sound output.

BroadcastOn Screen Display
MonoMONO
StereoSTEREO
DualDUAL I, DUAL II, DUAL I+II

■ Mono sound selection

If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception, you can switch to mono. In mono reception, the clarity of sound is improved.

■ Language selection for dual language broadcast

If a programme can be received in two languages (dual language), you can switch to DUAL I, DUAL II or DUAL I+II.

DUAL I Sends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.

DUAL II Sends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.

DUAL I+II Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker.

NICAM Reception (In Analogue Mode Only)

If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception, high quality NICAM (Near Instantaneous Companding Audio Multiplex) digital sound can be received.

Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received.

1 When NICAM mono is received, you can select NICAM MONO or FM MONO.
2 When NICAM stereo is received, you can select NICAM STEREO or FM MONO. If the stereo signal is weak, switch to FM MONO.
3 When NICAM dual is received, you can select NICAM DUAL I, NICAM DUAL II or NICAM DUAL I+II or FM MONO.

Speaker Sound Output Selection

In AV, Component, RGB and HDMI mode, you can select output sound for the left and right loudspeakers.

Select the sound output.

L+R: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from audio R input is sent to the right loudspeaker.

L+L: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.

R+R: Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.

ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY SELECTION

The installation guide menu appears on the TV screen when it is switched on for the first time.

LG 19LU5000 - ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY SELECTION - 1

Select your desired language.

LG 19LU5000 - ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY SELECTION - 2

Select your country.

* If you want to change Language/ Country selection

LG 19LU5000 - ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY SELECTION - 3

Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY SELECTION - 4

Select Menu Language or Country.

LG 19LU5000 - ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY SELECTION - 5

Select your desired language or country.

LG 19LU5000 - ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY SELECTION - 6

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

NOTE

▶ If you do not finish the set-up Installation Guide by pressing RETURN or if you time out on the OSD (On Screen Display) the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed whenever the TV is switched on.
▶ If you select the wrong local country, teletext may not appear correctly on the screen and some problems may occur during teletext operation.
The CI (Common Interface) function may not be applied based on country broadcasting circumstances.
▶ DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcasting circumstances.
In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn't fixed, some DTV function may not work depending on digital broadcasting circumstances.
The Country Setting "UK" should only be activated in UK.
If the country setting is set to "--", European terrestrial digital standard broadcasting programmes are available, but some DTV functions may not work properly.

LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)

The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language.

If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language audio will be played.

Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed.

When the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language are not supported, you can select language in secondary category.

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 1

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 2
Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 3

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 4
Select Audio Language or Subtitle Language.

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 5

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 6
Select your desired language.

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 7
Save.

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 8

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 9
Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 10

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 11

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 12
Select Hard of Hearing(☐).

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 13

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 14
Select On or Off.

- Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

< Audio Language Selection >

▶ When two or more audio languages are broadcast, you can select the audio language.

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 15
Select Audio

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 16
Select an audio language.

LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 17

Audio Language OSD Information

DisplayStatus
N.ANot Available
MPEGMPEG Audio
Dolby Digital Audio
Audio for “Visual Impaired”
LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 18Audio for “Hearing Impaired”
[KX7D]Dolby Digital Plus Audio
LG 19LU5000 - LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 19AAC Audio

Select L+R, L+L or R+R.

< Subtitle Language Selection >

▶ When two or more subtitle languages are broadcast, you can select the subtitle language with the SUBTITLE button on the remote control.
▶ Press the ^ ∨ button to select a subtitle language.

Subtitle Language OSD Information

DisplayStatus
N.ANot Available
Teletext Subtitle
Subtitle for “Hard of Hearing”
  • The audio/subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by the service provider.
  • When you select supplementary Audio (Audio for "Visual/Hearing Impaired") the TV may output a part of the Main audio.

TIME SETTING

CLOCK SETUP

The clock is set automatically when receiving a digital signal. (You can set the clock manually only if the TV has no DTV signal.)

You must set the time correctly before using on/off timer function.

When you select a Time Zone city, the TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time Zone and GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automatically by a digital signal.

Once Clock is set in DTV mode, you cannot change time, but if the city name in Time Zone is changed into offset, you can change time by 1 hour.

LG 19LU5000 - CLOCK SETUP - 1

text_image TIME Clock Off Time : Off On Time : Off Sleep Timer : Off

LG 19LU5000 - CLOCK SETUP - 2

LG 19LU5000 - CLOCK SETUP - 3

text_image TIME Clock Off Time : Off On Time : Off Sleep Timer : Off Date 01 Month Mar Year 2008 Hour 16 Minute 09 Time Zone London GMT Close

LG 19LU5000 - CLOCK SETUP - 4

Select TIME.

LG 19LU5000 - CLOCK SETUP - 5

Select Clock.

LG 19LU5000 - CLOCK SETUP - 6

Select either the year, month, date, time or Time Zone option.

LG 19LU5000 - CLOCK SETUP - 7

Set the year, month, date, time or Time Zone option.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING

The Off time function automatically switches the TV to standby at a preset time.

Two hours after the TV is switched on by the on time function it will automatically switch back to standby mode unless a button has been pressed.

The Off time function overrides the On time function if both are set to the same time.

The TV must be in standby mode for the On time to work.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 1

text_image TIME Clock Off Time : Off On Time : Off Sleep Timer : Off

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 2

text_image TIME Clock Off Time : On Time : On Time : Sleep Timer : 1 Mar. 2007 16:09 Repeat Off Hour 00 Minute 00 Input Antenna Programme TV1 Volume 30 Close

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 3

Select TIME.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 4

Select Off Time or On Time.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 5

Select Repeat.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 6

Select Off, Once, Daily, Mon \~ Fri, Mon \~ Sat, Sat \~ Sun or Sun.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 7

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 8

Set the hour.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 9

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 10

Set the minutes.

- To cancel On/Off Time function, select Off.

- For On Time function only

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 11

Select Input.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 12

Select Antenna or Cable, AV 1\~3, Component, RGB or HDMI1, HDMI2 (Except for 19/22LH20**), HDMI3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 32/37/42LF25**), HDMI4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**).

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 13

Set the programme.

LG 19LU5000 - AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING - 14

Adjust volume level at switch-on.

- Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.

- Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

SLEEP TIMER SETTING

You do not have to remember to switch the TV off before you go to sleep.

The sleep timer automatically switches the TV to standby after the preset time has elapsed.

LG 19LU5000 - SLEEP TIMER SETTING - 1

Select Sleep Timer.

LG 19LU5000 - SLEEP TIMER SETTING - 2

Select Off, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180 or 240 min..

  • When you switch the TV off, the preset sleep timer is cancelled.
  • You can also adjust Sleep Timer in the TIME menu.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS

SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM

Enter the password, press '0', '0', '0', '0' on the remote control handset.

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 1

text_image LOCK Lock System : Off Set Password Block Programme Parental Guidance : Blocking Off Input Block

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 2

text_image LOCK Lock System Set Password Block Programme Parental Guidance : Blocking Off Input Block

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 3

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 4

Select LOCK.

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 5

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 6

Select Lock System.

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 7

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 8

Select On.

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 9

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 10

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 11

Set the password.

LG 19LU5000 - SET PASSWORD &amp; LOCK SYSTEM - 12

Input a 4-digit password.

Be sure to remember this number!

Re-enter new password for confirm.

- If you forget your password, press '7', '7', '7', '7' on the remote control handset.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

BLOCK PROGRAMME

Blocks any programme that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.

It is available to use this function in Lock System "On".

Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.

LG 19LU5000 - BLOCK PROGRAMME - 1

text_image LOCK Lock System : Off Set Password Block Programme Parental Guidance : Blocking Off Input Block

LG 19LU5000 - BLOCK PROGRAMME - 2

LG 19LU5000 - BLOCK PROGRAMME - 3

text_image 1 YLE TV1 DTV RADIO TV 1 YLE TV1 2 YLE TV2 4 TV4 Stockholm 5 YLE FST 6 CNN 8 YLE24 9 YLE Teema 14 TV4 Film 24 TV4 Fakta 50 TV400 Pr. Change Navigation Page Change Previous Block/Unblock

LG 19LU5000 - BLOCK PROGRAMME - 4

Select LOCK.

LG 19LU5000 - BLOCK PROGRAMME - 5

Select Block Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - BLOCK PROGRAMME - 6

Enter the Block Programme.

LG 19LU5000 - BLOCK PROGRAMME - 7

Select a programme to be locked.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS

PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)

This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station. Therefore if the signal has incorrect information, this function does not operate.

A password is required to gain access to this menu.

This set is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you switch the set off.

Prevents children from watching certain adult's TV programmes, according to the ratings limit set.

Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.

LG 19LU5000 - PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 1

text_image LOCK Lock System : Off Set Password Block Programme Parental Guidance : Blocking Off Input Block

LG 19LU5000 - PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 2

text_image LOCK Lock System Set Password Block Programme Parental Guidance Input Block Blocking Off : Permits all programmes 10 and above 11 and above 12 and above 13 and above 14 and above 15 and above 16 and above 17 and above 18 and above Blocking Off

LG 19LU5000 - PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 3

text_image 1 MENU Select LOCK.

LG 19LU5000 - PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 4

flowchart
graph LR
    A["OK"] --> B["Select Parental Guidance"]
    C["✓"] --> B
    D["✓"] --> B

LG 19LU5000 - PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 5

text_image 3 OK Make appropriate adjustments.

LG 19LU5000 - PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) - 6

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING

Enables you to block an input.

LG 19LU5000 - EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING - 1

text_image LOCK Lock System : Off Set Password Block Programme Parental Guidance : Blocking Off Input Block

LG 19LU5000 - EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING - 2

LG 19LU5000 - EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING - 3

text_image AV1 AV2 AV3 Component RGB HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 Close (Except for 19/22LH20*) (Except for 19/22LU40** 19/22LU50** 19/22/26/32/37/ 42LH20** 32/37/42LF25*) (Only 32/37/42/47LH49** 32/37/42/47LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70** 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**)

LG 19LU5000 - EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING - 4

Select LOCK.

LG 19LU5000 - EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING - 5

Select Input Block.

LG 19LU5000 - EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING - 6

Select input source.

LG 19LU5000 - EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING - 7

Select On or Off.

LG 19LU5000 - EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING - 8

Save.

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.
  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS

KEY LOCK

The TV can be set so that the remote control is required to control it. This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing.

LG 19LU5000 - KEY LOCK - 1

text_image OPTION Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Hard of Hearing(□) : Off Country : UK Input Label SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off

LG 19LU5000 - KEY LOCK - 2

text_image OPTION Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Hard of Hearing(□) : Off Country : UK Input Label SIMPLINK : On Key Lock Off On

LG 19LU5000 - KEY LOCK - 3

Select OPTION.

LG 19LU5000 - KEY LOCK - 4

Select Key Lock.

LG 19LU5000 - KEY LOCK - 5

Select On or Off.

LG 19LU5000 - KEY LOCK - 6

  • In Key Lock 'On', if the TV is turned off, press the ⏻ / I, INPUT, P ▲ or ▼(or P ∧ ∨) button on the TV or POWER INPUT, P ∧ ∨ or NUMBER buttons on the remote control then the set will be turned on.
  • With the Key Lock On, the display '⚠️ Key Lock On' appears on the screen if any button on the front panel is pressed while viewing the TV. (Except for ⏻ / I button : Plasma TV only)

  • Press the MENU button to return to normal TV viewing.

  • Press the RETURN button to move to the previous menu screen.

This feature is not available in all countries.

Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV stations which gives up-to-the-minute information on news, weather, television programmes, share prices and many other topics.

The teletext decoder of this TV can support the SIMPLE, TOP and FASTEXT systems. SIMPLE (standard teletext) consists of a number of pages which are selected by directly entering the corresponding page number. TOP and FASTEXT are more modern methods allowing quick and easy selection of teletext information.

SWITCH ON/OFF

Press the TEXT button to switch to teletext. The initial page or last page viewed appears on the screen.

Two page numbers, TV station name, date and time are displayed on the screen headline. The first page number indicates your selection, while the second shows the current page displayed.

Press the TEXT button to switch off teletext. The previous mode reappears.

LG 19LU5000 - SWITCH ON/OFF - 1

text_image BEIJING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LIST 0 QVIEW + MUTE P - PAGE < OK > MENU RETURN / Exit TEXT T.OPT SWITCH Q.MENU INFOO RETURN INFO AV MODE EXIT MARK FAV + MUTE P - MUTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LIST 0 QVIEW TEXT T.OPT SUBTITLE

SIMPLE TEXT

■ Page selection

① Enter the desired page number as a three digit number with the NUMBER buttons. If during selection you press a wrong number, you must complete the three digit number and then re-enter the correct page number.
② The P ∧ ∨ button can be used to select the preceding or following page.

TOP TEXT

The user guide displays four fields-red, green, yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen. The yellow field denotes the next group and the blue field indicates the next block.

■ Block / group / page selection

① With the blue button you can progress from block to block.
② Use the yellow button to proceed to the next group with automatic overflow to the next block.
③ With the green button you can proceed to the next existing page with automatic overflow to the next group. Alternatively the P ^ button can be used.
4 The red button returns to the previous selection. Alternatively the P ∨ button can be used.

■ Direct page selection

As with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering it as a three digit number using the NUMBER buttons in TOP mode.

FASTEXT

The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the corresponding coloured button.

■ Page selection

① Press the T.OPT button and then use ∧ ∨ button to select ☐ menu. Display the index page.
② You can select the pages which are colour coded along the bottom line with corresponding coloured buttons.
③ AS with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering its three digit page number with the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode.
4 The P ∧ ∨ button can be used to select the preceding or following page.

SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS

■ Press the T. OPT button and then use ^ ∨ button to select the Text Option menu.

LG 19LU5000 - SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS - 1

Index

Select the each index page.

LG 19LU5000 - SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS - 2

Time

When viewing a TV programme, select this menu to display the time at the top right hand corner of the screen.

In the teletext mode, press this button to select a sub page number. The sub page number is displayed at the bottom of the screen. To hold or change the sub page, press the RED/GREEN, < > or NUMBER buttons.

LG 19LU5000 - SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS - 3

text_image Text Option Index Time Hold Reveal Update Close

LG 19LU5000 - SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS - 4

Hold

Stops the automatic page change which will occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more sub pages. The number of sub pages and the sub page displayed is, usually, shown on the screen below the time. When this menu is selected the stop symbol is displayed at the top left-hand corner of the screen and the automatic page change is inactive.

LG 19LU5000 - SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS - 5

■ Reveal

Select this menu to display concealed information, such as solutions to riddles or puzzles.

LG 19LU5000 - SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS - 6

Update

Displays the TV picture on the screen while waiting for a new teletext page. The display will appear at the top left hand corner of the screen. When the updated page is available then display will change to the page number. Select this menu again to view the updated teletext page.

DIGITAL TELETEXT

*This function works in UK, Ireland only.

The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is greatly improved in various aspects such as text, graphics etc. This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast digital teletext.

You should select off in the subtitle language menu to display teletext by pressing the SUBTITLE button.

TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE

1 Press the numeric or P ^ ∨ button to select a digital service which broadcasts digital teletext. To know which are digital teletext services, refer to the EPG service list.

2 Follow the indications on digital teletext and move onto the next step by pressing TEXT, OK, ^ ∨ < >, RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and etc..

3 To change digital teletext service, select a different service by the numeric or P ^ ∨ button.

LG 19LU5000 - TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE - 1

text_image LIVE North London BBC NEWS 24 BBC News News headlines and live events in video. News Multiscreen News: Headlines Christmas Comedy Preview Big Read Vote NEWS SPORT WEATHER MAIN MENUING 15:11 SUSPECT WAS TO TEST Press TEXT to exit BBC

TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE

1 Press the numeric or P ∧ ∨ button to select a certain service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2 Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on teletext.
3 Follow the indications on digital teletext and move onto the next step by pressing OK, ^ ∨ < > , RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and so on.
4 Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off digital tele-text and return to TV viewing.

Some services may allow you to access text services by pressing the RED button.

LG 19LU5000 - TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE - 1

text_image News 15:13 09 Dec Main Headlines UK World Politics In Depth UK Regions Sci-Tech Health Community JOGGER STABBING BBC News 24 Press BLUE to change section GO TO TV SHORTCUTS BACK MENU BBC 1

TROUBLESHOOTING

The TV does not operate properly.

The remote control does not workCheck to see if there is any object between the TV and the remote control causing an obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control directly at the TV.Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).Install new batteries.
Power is suddenly turned offIs the sleep timer set?Check the power control settings. Has the Power supply been interrupted.If the TV is switched on and there is no input signal, it will switch off automatically after 15 minutes.

The video function does not work.

No picture & No soundCheck whether the TV is switched on.Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.Is the power cord inserted correctly into the mains?Check your antenna direction and/or location.Test the mains outlet by plugging another TV into the same outlet.
Picture appears slowly after switching onThis is normal, the image is muted during the TV startup process. Please contact your service centre, if the picture has not appeared after five minutes.
No or poor colour or poor pictureAdjust Colour in menu option.Allow a sufficient distance between the TV and the VCR.Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.Are the video cables installed properly?Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.
Horizontal/vertical bars or picture shakingCheck for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power tool.
Poor reception on some channelsStation or cable channel experiencing problems, tune to another station.Station signal is weak, reposition the antenna to receive weaker stations.Check for sources of possible interference.
Lines or streaks in picturesCheck antenna (Change the position of the antenna).
No picture when connecting HDMICheck that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher.If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display can result. Please use the latest cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3.
The audio function does not work.
Picture OK & No soundPress the △ + or - button.Sound muted? Press MUTE button.Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.Are the audio cables installed properly?
No output from one of the speakersAdjust Balance in menu option.
Unusual sound from inside the TVA change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise when the TV is switched on or off and does not indicate a fault with the TV.
No sound when connecting HDMI or USBCheck HDMI cable over version 1.3.Check USB cable over version 2.0.*This feature is not available for all models.
There is a problem in PC mode. (Only PC mode applied)
The signal is out of range (Invalid format)■ Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency.■ Check the input source.
Vertical bar or stripe on background & Horizontal Noise & Incorrect position■ Use Auto configure or adjust clock, phase, or H/V position. (Option)
Screen colour is unstable or single colour■ Check the signal cable.■ Reinstall the PC video card.
There is a problem with PICTURE settings.
When the user changes the picture settings, the TV automatically converts back to the initial settings after a certain period of time.It means that the TV is currently set toStore Demo mode.To switch toHome usemode you should do the followings:From the TV Menu, chooseOPTION -> ChooseMode Setting -> ChooseHome use.Now, you have completed switching to theHome usemode.

APPENDIX

MAINTENANCE

Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can prolong the life of your new TV.

Caution: Be sure to switch the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.

Cleaning the Screen

1 A good way to keep the dust off your screen for a while is to wet a soft cloth in a mixture of lukewarm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it is almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen.
2 Ensure there is no excess water on the screen. Allow any water or dampness to evaporate before switching on.

Cleaning the Cabinet

■ To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
■ Do not to use a wet cloth.

Extended Absence

CAUTION

If you expect to leave your TV dormant for prolonged periods (such as a holiday), unplug the power cord to protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

MODELS32LH40**37LH40**
32LH4000-ZA32LH4010-ZD32LH4020-ZC37LH4000-ZA37LH4010-ZD37LH4020-ZC
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand804.4 x 586.3 x 223.8 mm31.7 x 23.1 x 8.8 inches804.4 x 589.1 x 210.9 mm31.7 x 23.2 x 8.3 inches924.7 x 666.7x 296.2mm36.4x 26.3 x 11.7 inches924.7 x 667.7x 270.6mm36.4x 26.3 x 10.7 inches
without stand804.4 x 529.2 x 81.0mm31.7 x 20.9 x 3.2 inches804.4 x 529.2 x 81.0mm31.7 x 20.9 x 3.2 inches924.7 x 599.9x 89.6mm36.4x 23.6 x 3.5 inches924.7 x 599.9x 89.6mm36.4x 23.6 x 3.5 inches
Weightwith stand12.7 kg / 28.0 lbs12.7 kg / 28.0 lbs15.8 kg / 34.9 lbs15.8 kg / 34.9 lbs
without stand11.5 kg / 25.4 lbs11.5 kg / 25.4 lbs14.0 kg / 30.9 lbs14.0 kg / 30.9 lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz150WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz150WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz180WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz180W
MODELS42LH40**47LH40**
42LH4000-ZA42LH4010-ZD42LH4020-ZC47LH4000-ZA47LH4010-ZD47LH4020-ZC
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand1036.0 x 721.3 x 296.2 mm40.8 x 28.4 x 11.7 inches1036.0 x 722.3 x 270.6 mm40.8 x 28.5 x 10.7 inches1153.2 x 791.5x 337.4mm45.4x 31.2 x 13.3 inches1153.2 x 793.3x 319.0mm45.4x 31.3 x 12.6 inches
without stand1036.0 x 655.4 x 89.8mm40.8x 25.8 x 3.6 inches1036.0 x 655.4 x 89.8mm40.8x 25.8 x 3.6 inches1153.2x 719.0x 99.8mm45.4x 28.3 x 3.9 inches1153.2x 719.0x 99.8mm45.4x 28.3 x 3.9 inches
Weightwith stand18.9 kg / 41.7 lbs18.9 kg / 41.7 lbs22.2 kg / 50.0 lbs22.4 kg / 49.4 lbs
without stand17.1 kg / 37.7 lbs17.1 kg / 37.7 lbs19.6 kg / 43.2 lbs19.6 kg / 43.2 lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz210WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz210WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz280WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz280W
CI Module Size(Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television SystemProgram CoverageExternal Antenna ImpedancePAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L'VHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S4775 Ω
Environment conditionOperating Temperature0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°F
Operating HumidityLess than 80%
Storage Temperature-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°F
Storage HumidityLess than 85%

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

MODELS32LH50**37LH50**
32LH5000-ZB32LH5010-ZD32LH5020-ZE37LH5000-ZB37LH5010-ZD37LH5020-ZE
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand815x 583.8x 223.8mm32.1 x 23.0 x 8.8 inches815x 585.6x 210.9mm32.1 x 23.1 x 8.3 inches940.8 x 665.2x 296.2mm37.1x 26.2 x 11.7 inches940.8 x 666.2x 270.6mm37.1x 26.2 x 10.7 inches
without stand815.0 x 529.6 x 82.0 mm32.1 x 20.9 x 3.2 inches815.0 x 529.6 x 82.0 mm32.1 x 20.9 x 3.2 inches940.8 x 603.5x 90.6mm37.1x 23.8 x 3.6 inches940.8 x 603.5x 90.6mm37.1x 23.8 x 3.6 inches
Weightwith stand12.6 kg / 27.8 lbs12.6 kg / 27.8 lbs16.3 kg / 35.9 lbs16.3 kg / 35.9 lbs
without stand11.4 kg / 25.2 lbs11.4 kg / 25.2 lbs14.5 kg / 32.0lbs14.5 kg / 32.0lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz150WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz150WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz180WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz180W
MODELS42LH50**47LH50**
42LH5000-ZB42LH5010-ZD42LH5020-ZE47LH5000-ZB47LH5010-ZD47LH5020-ZE
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand1052.2 x 719.1 x 296.2mm41.5x 28.3 x 11.7 inches1052.2 x 720.1 x 270.6mm41.5x 28.4 x 10.7 inches1173.4 x 789.7x 337.4mm46.2x 31.1 x 13.3 inches1173.4 x 791.4x 319.0mm46.2x 31.2 x 12.6 inches
without stand1052.2 x 657.3 x 90.8mm41.5 x 25.9 x 3.6 inches1052.2 x 657.3 x 90.8mm41.5 x 25.9 x 3.6 inches1173.4x 723.4x 100.8mm46.2x 28.5 x 4.0 inches1173.4x 723.4x 100.8mm46.2x 28.5 x 4.0 inches
Weightwith stand19.0 kg / 41.9 lbs19.0 kg / 41.9 lbs23.4 kg / 51.6 lbs23.6 kg / 52.0 lbs
without stand17.2 kg / 37.9 lbs17.2 kg / 37.9 lbs20.8 kg / 45.9 lbs20.8 kg / 45.9 lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz210WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz210WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz260WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz260W
CI Module Size(Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television SystemProgram CoverageExternal Antenna ImpedancePAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L'VHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S4775 Ω
Environment conditionOperating TemperatureOperating Humidity0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°FLess than 80%
Storage TemperatureStorage Humidity-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°FLess than 85%
Supported movie filesRefer to p.90

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

MODELS19LU50**22LU50**26LU50**
19LU5000-ZA19U5010-ZB19LU5020-ZC22LU5000-ZA22U5010-ZB22LU5020-ZC26LU5000-ZA26U5010-ZB26LU5020-ZC
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand462.0 x 373.0 x 182.0 mm18.2 x 14.7 x 7.2 inches529.1 x 416.6 x 196.0 mm20.9 x 16.4 x 7.7 inches668.0 x 538.3 x 236 mm26.3 x 21.2 x 9.3 inches
without stand462.0 x 305.0 x 65.0 mm18.2 x 12.0 x 2.6 inches529.1 x 342.3 x 65.0 mm20.9 x 13.5 x 2.6 inches668.0 x 456.0 x 81.0 mm26.3 x 18.0 x 3.2 inches
Weightwith stand4.4 kg / 9.7 lbs5.4 kg / 11.9 lbs9.0 kg / 19.9 lbs
without stand3.7 kg / 8.2 lbs4.6 kg / 10.2 lbs7.8 kg / 17.2 lbs
Power requirementAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz
Power Consumption40W55W120W
MODELS19LU40**22LU40**
19LU4000-ZB19LU4010-ZC22LU4000-ZB22LU4010-ZC
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand474.0 x 182.0 x 390.0 mm18.7 x 7.2x 15.4 inches474.0 x 182.0 x 390.0 mm18.7 x 7.2x 15.4 inches542.9 x 196.0 x 429.3 mm21.4 x 7.7 x 16.9 inches542.9 x 196.0 x 429.3 mm21.4 x 7.7 x 16.9 inches
without stand474.0 x 83.9 x 357.9 mm18.7 x 3.3 x 14.1 inches474.0 x 83.9 x 357.9 mm18.7 x 3.3 x 14.1 inches542.9 x 83.9 x 397.8 mm21.4 x 3.3 x 15.7 inches542.9 x 83.9 x 397.8 mm21.4 x 3.3 x 15.7 inches
Weightwith stand4.4 kg / 9.7 lbs4.4 kg / 9.7 lbs5.4 kg / 11.9 lbs5.4 kg / 11.9 lbs
without stand3.9 kg / 8.6 lbs3.9 kg / 8.6 lbs4.95 kg /10.9 lbs4.95 kg /10.9 lbs
Power requirementAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz
Power Consumption40W40W55W55W
CI Module Size(Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television SystemPAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L'
Program CoverageVHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S47
External Antenna Impedance75 Ω
Environment conditionOperating Temperature0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°FLess than 80%
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°FLess than 85%
Storage Humidity

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

MODELS19LH20**22LH20**26LH20**32LH20**
19LH2000-ZA19LH2010-ZB19LH2020-ZC22LH2000-ZA22LH2010-ZB22LH2020-ZC26LH2000-ZA26LH2010-ZB26LH2020-ZC32LH2000-ZA32LH2010-ZB32LH2020-ZC
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand462.4 x 353.0 x 171.0 mm18.2 x 13.9 x 6.8 inches533.4 x 397.0 x 171.0 mm21.0 x 15.7 x 6.8 inches667.0 x 504.0 x 224.0 mm26.3 x 19.9 x 8.8 inches804.0 x 583.0 x 223.8 mm31.7 x 23.0 x 8.8 inches
without stand462.4 x 308.0 x 65.0 mm18.2 x 12.2 x 2.6 inches533.4 x 351.7 x 65.0 mm21.0 x 13.9 x 2.6 inches667.0 x 446.2 x 80.0 mm26.3 x 17.6 x 3.2 inches804.0 x 528.0 x 79.9mm31.7 x 20.8 x 3.2 inches
Weightwith stand3.8 kg / 8.4 lbs4.8 kg / 10.6 lbs8.9 kg / 19.7 lbs11.8 kg / 26.0 lbs
without stand3.6 kg / 8.0 lbs4.6 kg / 10.2 lbs7.8 kg / 17.2 lbs10.7 kg / 23.6 lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz40WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz55WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz110WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz150W
MODELS37LH20**42LH20**
37LH2000-ZA37LH2010-ZB/37LH2020-ZC42LH2000-ZA42LH2010-ZB/42LH2020-ZC
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand922.0 x 659.0x 297.0mm36.3x 26.0 x 11.7 inches1028.0 x 715.4 x 297.0mm40.5x 28.2 x 11.7 inches
without stand922.0 x 594.0x 88.0mm36.3x 23.4 x 3.5 inches1028.0 x 655.0x 87.8mm40.5 x 25.8 x 3.5 inches
Weightwith stand14.9 kg / 32.9 lbs17.9 kg / 39.5 lbs
without stand13.1 kg / 28.9 lbs16.1 kg / 35.5 lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz180WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz210W
CI Module Size(Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television SystemProgram CoverageExternal Antenna ImpedancePAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L'VHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S4775 Ω
Environment conditionOperating TemperatureOperating Humidity0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°FLess than 80%
Storage TemperatureStorage Humidity-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°FLess than 85%

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

MODELS32LH30**37LH30**
32LH3000-ZA/32LH3010-ZB32LH3020-ZD/32LH3030-ZE37LH3000-ZA/37LH3010-ZB37LH3020-ZD/37LH3030-ZE
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand804.0 x 583.0 x 223.8 mm31.7 x 23.0 x 8.8 inches922.0 x 659.0x 297.0mm36.3x 26.0 x 11.7 inches
without stand804.0x 527.0x 79.9mm31.7 x 20.8 x 3.2 inches922.0 x 596.0x 88.0mm36.3x 23.5 x 3.5 inches
Weightwith stand12.1 kg / 26.7 lbs15.1 kg / 33.3 lbs
without stand11.0 kg / 24.3 lbs13.3 kg / 29.3 lbs
Power requirementAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz
Power Consumption150W180W
MODELS42LH30**47LH30**
42LH3000-ZA/42LH3010-ZB42LH3020-ZD/42LH3030-ZE47LH3000-ZA/47LH3010-ZB47LH3020-ZD/47LH3030-ZE
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand1028.0 x 715.4 x 297.0mm40.5x 28.2 x 11.7 inches1140.6 x 784.8 x 337.4 mm44.9 x 30.9 x 13.3 inches
without stand1028.0x 658.6x 87.8mm40.5 x 25.9 x 3.5 inches1140.6 x 722.9 x 99.0 mm44.9 x 28.5 x 3.9 inches
Weightwith stand17.9 kg / 39.5 lbs22.3 kg / 49.2 lbs
without stand16.1 kg / 35.5 lbs19.7 kg / 43.5 lbs
Power requirementAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz
Power Consumption210W280W
CI Module Size(Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television SystemProgram CoverageExternal Antenna ImpedancePAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L'VHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S4775 Ω
Environment conditionOperating Temperature0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°F
Operating HumidityLess than 80%
Storage Temperature-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°F
Storage HumidityLess than 85%

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

MODELS32LH70**37LH70**
32LH7000-ZA/32LH7010-ZD32LH7020-ZC/32LH7030-ZE37LH7000-ZA/37LH7010-ZD37LH7020-ZC/37LH7030-ZE
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand803 x 632.9 x 284.8 mm31.6 x 24.9 x 11.2 inches903x 689.1x 299.5mm35.5x 27.1 x 11.7inches
without stand803 x 584.2 x 75mm31.6 x 23 x 2.9 inches903 x 639.4x 51.8mm35.5 x 25.1 x 2.0inches
Weightwith stand13.5kg / 29.7 lbs16.2kg / 35.7 lbs
without stand11.6kg /25.5 lbs14.1 kg / 31.0lbs
Power requirementAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz
Power Consumption150W180W
MODELS42LH70**47LH70**
42LH7000-ZA/42LH7010-ZD42LH7020-ZC/42LH7030-ZE47LH7000-ZA/47LH7010-ZD47LH7020-ZC/47LH7030-ZE
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand1009.7 x 753.6 x 334.4 mm39.7 x 29.6x 13.1 inches1123.6 x 824.4x 372.8 mm44.2 x 32.5 x 14.7 inches
without stand1009.7 x 695.4 x 39.7 mm39.7 x 27.3 x 1.5inches1123.6 x 765.7x 40.9 mm44.2 x 30.2 x 1.6inches
Weightwith stand19.8 kg / 43.7 lbs26.4 kg / 58.2 lbs
without stand17.2 kg / 37.9lbs22.8 kg / 50.2 lbs
Power requirementAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz
Power Consumption230W300W
CI Module Size(Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television SystemPAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L'
Program CoverageVHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S47
External Antenna Impedance75 Ω
Environment conditionOperating Temperature0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°F
Operating HumidityLess than 80%
Storage Temperature-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°F
Storage HumidityLess than 85%
Supported movie filesRefer to p.90

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

MODELS32LH49**37LH49**
32LH4900-ZD37LH4900-ZD
Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth)with stand804.4 x 589.1 x 210.9 mm924.7 x 667.7x 270.6mm
31.7 x 23.2 x 8.3 inches36.4x 26.3 x 10.7 inches
without stand804.4 x 529.2 x 81.0mm924.7 x 599.9x 89.6mm
31.7 x 20.9 x 3.2 inches36.4x 23.6 x 3.5 inches
Weightwith stand12.7 kg / 28.0 lbs15.8 kg / 34.9 lbs
without stand11.5 kg / 25.4 lbs14.0 kg / 30.9 lbs
Power requirement Power ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz
150W180W
MODELS42LH49**47LH49**
42LH4900-ZD47LH4900-ZD
Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth)with stand1036.0 x 722.3 x 270.6 mm1153.2 x 793.3x 319.0mm
40.8 x 28.5 x 10.7 inches45.4x 31.3 x 12.6 inches
without stand1036.0 x 655.4 x 89.8mm1153.2x 719.0x 99.8mm
40.8x 25.8 x 3.6 inches45.4x 28.3 x 3.9 inches
Weightwith stand18.9 kg / 41.7 lbs22.4 kg / 49.4 lbs
without stand17.1 kg / 37.7 lbs19.6 kg / 43.2 lbs
Power requirement Power ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60HzAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz
210W280W
CI Module Size (Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm
3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television System Program Coverage External Antenna ImpedancePAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L' VHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S47
75 Ω
Environment conditionOperating Temperature0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°F
Operating HumidityLess than 80%
Storage Temperature-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°F
Storage HumidityLess than 85%
Supported movie filesRefer to p.90

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

MODELS32LF25**37LF25**42LF25**
32LF2500-ZA37LF2500-ZA42LF2500-ZA
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand801.8 x 604.2 x 227.8 mm31.6 x 23.8 x 9.0 inches919.6 x 682.3 x 289.0 mm36.2 x 26.9 x 11.4 inches1032.8 x 742.3 x 289.0 mm40.7 x 29.3 x 11.4 inches
without stand801.8 x 544.1 x 79.0 mm31.6 x 21.5 x 3.2 inches919.6 x 610.3 x 89.0 mm36.2 x 24.0 x 3.5 inches1032.8 x 670.1 x 92.0 mm40.7 x 26.4 x 3.7 inches
Weightwith stand13.4 kg / 29.6 lbs18.8 kg / 41.5 lbs23.6 kg / 52.1 lbs
without stand11.9 kg / 26.3 lbs16.2 kg / 35.7 lbs21.0 kg / 46.3 lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz150WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz180WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz210W
CI Module Size(Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television SystemProgram CoverageExternal Antenna ImpedancePAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L'VHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S4775 Ω
Environment conditionOperating Temperature0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°F
Operating HumidityLess than 80%
Storage Temperature-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°F
Storage HumidityLess than 85%

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

MODELS50PS70**60PS70**
50PS7000-ZA60PS7000-ZA
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand1228.0 x 835.8 x 309 mm48.4 x 32.9x 12.2inches1465.4x 986.4 x 371 mm57.7 x 38.9 x 14.6 inches
without stand1228.0x 784.5 x 78.9 mm48.4 x 30.9 x 3.1 inches1465.4 x 932.2 x 82.1 mm57.7 x 36.7 x 3.2 inches
Weightwith stand38.1 kg / 84.0 lbs51.8kg / 114.2 lbs
without stand34.1kg / 75.2 lbs45.0kg / 99.2 lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz490WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz580W
MODELS50PS80**60PS80**
50PS8000-ZA60PS8000-ZA
Dimensions(Width x Height x Depth)with stand1228.0 x 835.8 x 309 mm48.4 x 32.9x 12.2inches1465.4x 986.4 x 371 mm57.7 x 38.9 x 14.6 inches
withoutstand1228.0x 795.1 x 78.9 mm48.4 x 31.3 x 3.1 inches1465.4 x 926.7 x 82.1 mm57.7 x 36.5 x 3.2 inches
Weightwith stand38.3 kg / 84.4 lbs52.8kg / 116.4 lbs
without stand34.3kg / 75.6 lbs46.0kg / 101.4 lbs
Power requirementPower ConsumptionAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz490WAC100-240V~ 50/60Hz580W
CI Module Size(Width x Height x Depth)100.0 x 55.0 x 5.0mm3.94 x 2.17 x 0.20inches
Television SystemProgram CoverageExternal Antenna ImpedancePAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, SECAM L/L'VHF: E2 ~ E12, UHF: E21 ~ E69, CATV: S1 ~ S20, HYPER: S21 ~ S4775 Ω
Environment conditionOperating Temperature0 ~ 40°C / 32 ~ 104°F
Operating HumidityLess than 80%
Storage Temperature-20 ~ 60°C / -4 ~ 140°F
Storage HumidityLess than 85%
Supported movie filesRefer to p.90

■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.

IR CODES

1. How to Connect

■ Connect your wired remote control to the Remote Control port on the TV.

2. Remote Control IR Codes

■ Output waveform

Single pulse, modulated with 37.917KHz signal at 455KHz

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Output waveform - 1

text_image Tc T1

Carrier frequency

$$ \mathrm{FCAR} = 1 / \mathrm{Tc} = \mathrm{fOSC} / 1 2 $$

$$ \text { Duty ratio } = \mathrm{T1/Tc} = 1 / 3 $$

■ Configuration of frame

1st frame

text_image Repeat code Tf

Lead code

LG 19LU5000 - Lead code - 1

text_image 9 ms 4.5 ms

■ Repeat code

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Repeat code - 1

line | Time Interval | Value | | ------------- | --------- | | 0.55 ms | 0.55 ms | | 9 ms | 9 ms | | 2.25 ms | 2.25 ms |

■ Bit description

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Bit description - 1

text_image Bit "0" 0.56 ms 1.12 ms

LG 19LU5000 - ■ Bit description - 2

text_image Bit "1" 0.56 ms 2.24 ms

Frame interval: Tf

The waveform is transmitted as long as a key is depressed.

LG 19LU5000 - Frame interval: Tf - 1

text_image Tf Tf Tf=108ms @455KHz
Code (Hexa)FunctionNote
95Energy SavingR/C BUTTON
08POWERR/C BUTTON(POWER ON/OFF)
0BINPUTR/C BUTTON
79RATIOR/C BUTTON
F0TV/RADR/C BUTTON
45Q.MENUR/C BUTTON
43MENUR/C BUTTON
ABGUIDER/C BUTTON
40Up ( )R/C BUTTON
41Down ( )R/C BUTTON
07Left (< )R/C BUTTON
06Right (>)R/C BUTTON
44OK( )R/C BUTTON
28RETURN/EXITR/C BUTTON
AAINFO 1 R/C BUTTON
30AV MODER/C BUTTON
02 ^R/C BUTTON
03 R/C BUTTON
1EFAV (MARK)R/C BUTTON
09MUTER/C BUTTON
00P ^R/C BUTTON
01P R/C BUTTON
10~19Number Key 0~9R/C BUTTON
53LISTR/C BUTTON
1AQ.VIEWR/C BUTTON
72RED KeyR/C BUTTON
71GREEN KeyR/C BUTTON
63YELLOW KeyR/C BUTTON
61BLUE KeyR/C BUTTON
20TEXTR/C BUTTON
21T.OPT(T.Option)R/C BUTTON
39SUBTITLER/C BUTTON
7ESIMPLINKR/C BUTTON
65FREEZE(Plasma TV only)R/C BUTTON

EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP

RS-232C Setup

Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to an external control device (such as a computer or an A/V control system) to control the product's functions externally.

Connect the serial port of the control device to the RS-232C jack on the product back panel.

Note: RS-232C connection cables are not supplied with the product.

LG 19LU5000 - RS-232C Setup - 1

text_image RF-282C IN CONTROL REMO B3

Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male

No.Pin Name
1No connection
2RXD (Receive data)
3TXD (Transmit data)
4DTR (DTE side ready)
5GND
6DSR (DCE side ready)
7RTS (Ready to send)
8CTS (Clear to send)
9No Connection

LG 19LU5000 - RS-232C Setup - 2

text_image 1 5 6 9

RS-232C Configurations

7-Wire Configurations (Standard RS-232C cable)
PCTV
RXD23TXD
TXD32RXD
GND55GND
DTR46DSR
DSR64DTR
RTS78CTS
CTS87RTS
D-Sub 9D-Sub 9
3-Wire Configurations(Not standard)
PCTV
RXD2 ●3TXD
TXD3 ●2RXD
GND5 ●5GND
DTR46DTR
DSR64DSR
RTS77RTS
CTS88CTS
D-Sub 9D-Sub 9

APPENDIX

Set ID

Use this function to specify a set ID number.

Adjust Set ID to choose the desired TV ID number.

The adjustment range of SET ID is 1\~99.

- Press RETURN to move to the previous menu screen.

Communication Parameters

■ Baud rate : 9600 bps (UART)
■ Data length : 8 bits
Parity : None

■ Stop bit : 1 bit
■ Communication code : ASCII code
■ Use a crossed (reverse) cable.

Command Reference List

COMMAND 1COMMAND 2DATA (Hexadecimal)
01. Powerka00 ~ 01
02. Aspect RatiokcRefer to p. 155
03. Screen Mutekd00 ~ 01
04. Volume Muteke00 ~ 01
05. Volume Controlkf00 ~ 64
06. Contrastkg00 ~ 64
07. Brightnesskh00 ~ 64
08. Colourki00 ~ 64
09. Tintkj00 ~ 64
10. Sharpnesskk00 ~ 64
11. OSD Selectkl00 ~ 01
12. Remote control lock modekm00 ~ 01
13. Treblekr00 ~ 64
14. Bassks00 ~ 64
15. Balancekt00 ~ 64
16. Colour Temperatureku00 ~ 02
17. ISM MethodjpRefer to p. 157
18. Energy Savingjq00 ~ 04
19. Auto Configurationju01
20. Tune CommandmaRefer to p. 157
21. Programme Add/Skipmb00 ~ 01
22. KeymcKey C ode
23. Control Back Lightmg00 ~ 64
24. Input select (Main)xbRefer to p. 158

Transmission / Receiving Protocol

Transmission

[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

* [Command 1] : First command to control the TV. (j, k, m or x)
* [Command 2] : Second command to control the TV.
* [Set ID] : You can adjust the set ID to choose desired monitor ID number in option menu. Adjustment range is 1 \~ 99. When selecting Set ID '0', every connected set is controlled. Set ID is indicated as decimal (1\~99) on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0\~0x63) on transmission/receiving protocol.

* [DATA] : To transmit command data. Transmit 'FF' data to read status of command.

* [Cr] : Carriage Return ASCII code '0x0D'

* [ ] : ASCII code 'space (0x20)'

OK Acknowledgement

[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]

* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on this format when receiving normal data. At this time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates present status data. If the data is data write mode, it returns the data of the PC computer.

Error Acknowledgement

[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]

* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on this format when receiving abnormal data from non-viable functions or communication errors.

* When setting the 17 \~ 24, a menu does not appear on screen. Data 00: Illegal Code
* Note : During USB operations such as Dvix or EMF, all commands except Power(ka) and Key(mc) are not executed and treated as NG.

01. Power (Command: k a)

▶ To control Power On/Off of the set.

Transmission

[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 00 : Power Off 01 : Power On

Ack

[a][ ] [Set ID][ ] [OK/NG][Data][x]

▶ To show Power On/Off.

Transmission

[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][FF][Cr]

Ack

[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

* Similarly, if other functions transmit '0xFF' data based on this format, Acknowledgement data feed back presents status about each function.
* OK Ack., Error Ack. and other message may display on the screen when TV is power On.

02. Aspect Ratio (Command: k c) (Main Picture Size)

▶ To adjust the screen format. (Main picture format) You can also adjust the screen format using the Aspect Ratio in the Q.MENU. or PICTURE menu.

Transmission

[k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 01 : Normal screen (4:3)07 : 14:9
02 : Wide screen (16:9)09 : Just Scan
04 : Zoom0B : Full Wide
06 : Original10~1F : Cinema Zom 1~16

Ack

[c][ ] [Set ID][ ] [OK/NG][Data][x]

* Using the PC input, you select either 16:9 or 4:3 screen aspect ratio.
* In DTV/HDMI (1080i 50Hz/60Hz, 720p 50Hz/60Hz, 1080p 24Hz/30Hz/50Hz/60Hz), Component( 720p, 1080i, 1080p 50Hz/60Hz) mode, Just Scan is available.
* Full Wide is supported only for Analogue, AV1,2,3.

03. Screen Mute (Command: k d)

▶ To select screen mute on/off.

Transmission

[k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 00: Screen mute off (Picture on)Video mute off
01: Screen mute on (Picture off)
10: Video mute on

Ack

[d][ ] [Set ID][ ] [OK/NG][Data][x]

* In case of video mute on only, TV will display On Screen Display(OSD). But, in case of Screen mute on, TV will not display OSD.

04. Volume Mute (Command: k e)

▶ To control volume mute on/off. You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on remote control.

Transmission

[k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 00 : Volume mute on (Volume off) 01 : Volume mute off (Volume on)

Ack

[e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

05. Volume Control (Command: k f)

▶ To adjust volume. You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME buttons on remote control.

Transmission

[k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data Min : 00 \~ Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 157.

Ack

[f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

06. Contrast (Command: k g)

▶ To adjust screen contrast. You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.

Transmission

[k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data Min : 00 \~ Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 157.

Ack

[g][ ] [Set ID][ ] [OK/NG] [Data] [x]

07. Brightness (Command: k h)

▶ To adjust screen brightness. You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu.

Transmission

[k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data Min : 00 \~ Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’ See page 157.

Ack

[h][ ] [Set ID][ ] [OK/NG] [Data][x]

08. Colour (Command: k i)

▶ To adjust the screen colour. You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu.

Transmission

[k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data Min : 00 \~ Max : 64 * Refer to 'Real data mapping 1'. See page 157. Ack

[i][ ] [Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

09. Tint (Command: k j)

▶ To adjust the screen tint. You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.

Transmission

[k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data Red : 00 \~ Green : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 157.

Ack

[j][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

10. Sharpness (Command: k k)

▶ To adjust the screen sharpness. You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu.

Transmission

[k][k][ ] [Set ID][ ] [Data][Cr]

Data Min : 00 \~ Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’ See page 157.

Ack

[k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

11. OSD Select (Command: k l)

▶ To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off when controlling remotely.

Transmission

[k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 00 : OSD off 01 : OSD on

Ack

[1] [ ] [Set ID] [ ] [OK/NG] [Data] [x]

12. Remote control lock mode (Command: k m)

▶ To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and remote control.

Transmission

[k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 00 : Lock off 01 : Lock on

Ack

[m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

* If you are not using the remote control, use this mode. When main power is on/off, external control lock is released.
* Local Power Key will work properly.

13. Treble (Command: k r)

▶ To adjust treble. You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu.

Transmission

[k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data Min : 00 \~ Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’ See page 157.

Ack

[r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

▶ To adjust bass. You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu.

Transmission

[k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data Min : 00 \~ Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’ See page 157.

Ack

[s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

15. Balance (Command: k t)

▶ To adjust balance. You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu.

Transmission

[k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data Min : 00 \~ Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 157.

Ack

[t][ ] [Set ID][ ] [OK/NG] [Data][x]

16. Colour Temperature (Command: k u)

▶ To adjust colour temperature. You can also adjust Colour Temperature in the PICTURE menu.

Transmission

[k][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Data 00: Medium 01: Cool 02: Warm

Ack

[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

17. ISM Method (Plasma TV only) (Command: j p)

▶ To control the ISM method. You can also adjust ISM Method in OPTION menu.

Transmission

$$ [ j ] [ p ] [ ] [ \text {Set ID} ] [ ] [ \text {Data} ] [ C r ] $$

Data 02: Orbiter

04: White wash

08: Normal

20: Colour Wash

Ack

$$ [ p ] [ ] [ \text {Set ID} ] [ ] [ \text {OK / NG} ] [ \text {Data} ] [ x ] $$

18. Energy Saving (Command: j q)

▶ To reduce the power consumption of the TV. You can also adjust Energy Saving in OPTION menu.

Transmission

[j][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]

Power Saving FunctionLevelDescription
76543210
0000Low Power0000Off
0000Low Power0001Minimum
0000Low Power0010Medium
0000Low Power0011Maximum
0000Low Power0100Auto
0000Low Power0101Screen Off(LCD TV only)
0001Intelligent Sensor0000Low(Plasma TV only)
0001Intelligent Sensor0001Middle(Plasma TV only)
0001Intelligent Sensor0010High(Plasma TV only)

Ack

[q][ ] [Set ID][ ] [OK/NG] [Data] [x]

(except for 19/22LU40**,

19/22/26LU50**

32/37/42LF25**

19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**

32/37/42/47LH30**

50/60PS70**

50/60PS80**)

19. Auto Configure(Command: j u)

▶ To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking automatically. It works only in RGB (PC) mode.

Transmission

$$ [ j ] [ u ] [ ] [ \text {Set ID} ] [ ] [ \text {Data} ] [ C r ] $$

Data 01: To set

Ack

$$ [ u ] [ ] [ \text {Set ID} ] [ ] [ \text {OK / NG} ] [ \text {Data} ] [ x ] $$

20. Tune Command (Command: m a)

▶ Select channel to following physical number.

Transmission

$$ [ m ] [ a ] [ ] [ \text {Set ID} ] [ ] [ \text {Data0} ] [ ] [ \text {Data1} ] [ ] [ \text {Data2} ] [ \text {Cr} ] $$

Data00 : High channel data

Data01 : Low channel data

ex. No. 47 -> 00 2F (2FH)

No. 394 -> 01 88 (188H),

DTV No. 0 -> Don't care

Data020x00 : Analogue Main

0x10 : DTV Main

0x20 : Radio

Channel data range

Analogue - Min: 00 \~ Max: 63 (0\~99)

Digital - Min: 00 \~ Max: 3E7 (0\~999)

Ack

$$ [ a ] [ ] [ \text {Set ID} ] [ ] [ \text {OK / NG} ] [ \text {Data} ] [ x ] $$

Data Min: 00 \~ Max: 7DH

21. Programme Add/Skip(Command: m b)

▶ To set skip status for the current Programme.

Transmission

$$ [ m ] [ b ] [ ] [ \text {Set ID} ] [ ] [ \text {Data} ] [ C r ] $$

▶ To send IR remote key code.

Transmission

$$ [ m ] [ c ] [ ] [ \text { Set ID } ] [ ] [ \text { Data } ] [ C r ] $$

Data Key code - Refer to page 151.

Ack

$$ [ c ] [ ] [ \text { Set ID } ] [ ] [ \text { OK / NG } ] [ \text { Data } ] [ x ] $$

23. Control Back Light (Command: m g) (LCD TV only)

▶ To Control the back light.

Transmission

$$ [ m ] [ g ] [ ] [ \text { Set ID } ] [ ] [ \text { Data } ] [ C r ] $$

Data : data Min: 00 \~ Max: 64

Ack

$$ [ g ] [ ] [ \text { Set ID } ] [ ] [ \text { OK / NG } ] [ \text { Data } ] [ x ] $$

24. Input select (Command: x b) (Main Picture Input)

▶ To select input source for main picture.

Transmission

$$ [ x ] [ b ] [ ] [ \text { Set ID } ] [ ] [ \text { Data } ] [ C r ] $$

Data Structure

MSB

LSB

00000000

LG 19LU5000 - Input select (Command: x b) (Main Picture Input) - 1

LG 19LU5000 - Input select (Command: x b) (Main Picture Input) - 2

External InputData
0000DTV
0001Analogue
0010AV
0100Component
0110RGB
1001HDMI
Input NumberData
0000Input1
0001Input2
0010Input3
0011Input4

Ack

[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]

Open source software notice

The following GPL executables and LGPL/MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the GPL2.0/LGPL2.1/MPL1.1 License Agreements:

GPL EXECUTABLES:

  • busybox
  • lzo

- Linux kernel 2.6

LGPL LIBRARIES:

• uClibc

MPL LIBRARIES:

- Nanox

LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling upon e-mail request to LG Electronics at: opensource@lge.com

This offer is valid for a period of three(3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by LG Electronics.

You can obtain a copy of the GPL, LGPL, MPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html, http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html. Also you can obtain the translation of GPL, LGPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0-translations.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1-translations.html.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright © 1991 – 1998, Thomas G. Lane.

This product includes

  • libpng library : copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
    • Zlib compression library: Copyright © 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.
  • Tinyxml library : copyright (c) 2000-2006 Lee Thomason

OPEN SOURCE LICENSE

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

  1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

  1. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

  1. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

  1. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

  2. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

  3. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

  4. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

  1. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

  2. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

  1. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

  1. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
  2. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

Copyright (C)

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.

The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999

Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

  1. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".

A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.

The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)

"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

  1. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

  1. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.

This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.

  1. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

  1. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

  1. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:

a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.

c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.

  1. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
    a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
    b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
  2. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
  3. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
  4. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
  5. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

  1. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

  2. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

  1. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

  1. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

  2. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

Copyright (C)

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice

MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 1.1

[EMPTY]

1. Definitions.

1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code.
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License.
1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1.
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.

2. Source Code License.

2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.

The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims:

(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and

(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.

2.2. Contributor Grant.

Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license

(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.

3. Distribution Obligations.

3.1. Application of License.

The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.

3.2. Availability of Source Code.

Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.

3.3. Description of Modifications.

You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code.

3.4. Intellectual Property Matters

(a) Third Party Claims.

If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has been obtained.

(b) Contributor APIs.

If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the LEGAL file.

(c) Representations.

Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License.

3.5. Required Notices.

You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.

3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.

You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this

License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.

3.7. Larger Works.

You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.

  1. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.

If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the

extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.

  1. Application of this License.

This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code.

  1. Versions of the License.

6.1. New Versions.

Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.

6.2. Effect of New Versions.

Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License.

6.3. Derivative Works.

If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)

7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.

COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABILITY, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.

8. TERMINATION.

8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declaratory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as "Participant") alleging that:
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination.

9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.

The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.

11. MISCELLANEOUS.

This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License.

12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.

As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability.

13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.

Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.

EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.

`The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/

Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.

The Original Code is ____.

The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ____.

Portions created by ____ are Copyright (C) ____. All Rights Reserved.

Contributor(s): ____.

Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the ____ license (the "[____] License"), in which case the provisions of [____] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [____] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [____] License."

[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]

LG Electronics Inc.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : LG

Model : 19LU5000

Category : Television